Home
        PM-9000 Portable Multi-Parameter Patient Monitor
         Contents
1.                              Size No    Limb perimeter PN Factory PN   1 3 1 5 7 cm 900E 10 04876   Pediatric PHILIPS M1866A  2 4 3 8 0cm_   900E 10 04875   Pediatric PHILIPS M1868A  3 5 8   10 9cm   900E 10 04874   Pediatric PHILIPS M1870A  4 7 1   13 1cm   900E 10 04873   Pediatric PHILIPS M1872A       20 4 TEMP Accessories    NAME YSI PN Application    Temperature Probe YSI 401 0509 10 00095   Adult esophageal and rectal  temperature measurements    temperature measurements  Skin TEMP probe YSI 409B   900E 10 04881   Can easily be taped to the skin to   Adult  give surface temperature readings          Skin TEMP probe YSI 427 0010 10 12124   Can easily be taped to the skin to  Pediatric give surface temperature readings    20 5 IBP Accessories    ICP encephalic pressure transducer ICT B   GADTEC    P N 0010 10 12151  6PIN ICP cable assembly  ver  A P N 0010 21 12154  IBP cable PX1800 896019021 EDWARDS P N 0010 10 12177  IBP cable TC VTK  OHMEDA  or  BD  P N 6000 10 02106       Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  20 3    Accessories and Ordering Information    Disposable IBP transducer DT 4812 OHMEDA  or  BD   Reusable IBP transducer P23XL  OHMEDA     Disposable IBP pressure transducer PX260 EDWARDS    Edwards two disposable IBP pressure transducer PX2X2    20 6 CO Accessories    IT sensor OHMEDA P  N  SP4042  BD   IT sensor cap OHMEDA P N  SP5045  BD   Anti pressure three circles injector 12CC    6PIN CO trunk cable assembly    20 7 CO2 Accessories    008 0781  00 EtCO
2.                          9 4 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4        Chapter 10 Patient Safety    The PM 9000 Portable Patient Monitor is designed to comply with the International National  Safety requirements for medical electrical equipment  This device has floating inputs and is  protected against the effects of defibrillation and electrosurgery  If the correct electrodes are  used and applied in accordance with the manufacturer instructions  the screen display will  recover within 10 seconds after defibrillation     Y    This symbol indicates that the instrument is IEC 60601 1 Type CF equipment  The unit                displaying this symbol contains an F Type isolated  floating  patient applied part providing a  high degree of protection against shock  and is suitable for use during defibrillation     A Warning A    Do not touch the patient  bed or instrument during defibrillation   Environment    Follow the instructions below to ensure a completely safe electrical installation  The  environment where the PM 9000 Portable Patient Monitor will be used should be reasonably  free from vibration  dust  corrosive or explosive gases  extremes of temperature  humidity  and  so on  For a cabinet mounted installation  allow sufficient room at the front for operation and  sufficient room at the rear for servicing with the cabinet access door open     The PM 9000 Portable Patient Monitor operates within specifications at ambient temperatures  between 0  C and 40  C  Ambient t
3.            Cleaning and reuse of Masimo LNOP sensors   Reusable sensors can be cleaned per the following procedure    E Remove the sensor from the patient    m Disconnect the sensor from the monitor    m Wipe the entire sensor clean with a 70 isopropy  alcohol pad   H Allow the sensor to air dry before returning it to operation     Reattachment of single use adhesive sensors  m LNOP single use sensors may be reapplied to the same patient if the emitter and    detector windows are clear and the adhesive still adheres to the skin   m The adhesive can be partially rejuvenated by wiping with a 70 isopropyl alcohol wipe       Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  13 9    SpO2 Monitoring    and allowing the sensor to thoroughly air dry prior to replacement on the patient     AY Warning A    To avoid cross contamination only use Masimo LNOP single use sensors on the same  patient     A Note    If the sensor fails to track the pulse consistently  the sensors may be incorrectly  positioned  Reposition the sensor or choose a different monitoring site     A Caution A    Do not reprocess any LNOP single use sensors   m  MASIMO SET PATIENT CABLES     Reusable patient cables of various lengths are available  All cables that display the Masimo  SET logo are designed to work with any Masimo LNOP sensor and with any pulse oximeter or  multiparameter instrument displaying the Masimo SET logo    Only use Masimo oximetry patient cables for SoO2 measurements  Other patient cables may  cause imp
4.         ST1 EXCEED             Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  12 15    ECG RESP Monitoring       ST measuring value of channel 2 exceeds the    ST2 EXCEED measurement range     HIGH    12 8 Arr  Monitoring  optional     Arrhythmia Analysis    The arrhythmia algorithm is used to monitor ECG of neonate and adult patient in clinical   detect the changing of heart rate and ventricular rhythm  and also save arrhythmia events and  generate alarming information  Arrhythmia algorithm can monitor paced and non paced  patients  Qualified personnel can use arrhythmia analysis to evaluate patient   s condition  Such  as heart rate  PVCs frequency  rhythm and ectopic beat  and decide the treatment  Besides  detecting changing of ECG  arrhythmia algorithm can also monitor patients and give proper  alarm for arrhythmia     m  The arrhythmia monitoring is shutoff by default  You can enable it when necessary       This function can call up the doctor s attention to the patient s heart rate by measuring  and classifying the arrhythmia and abnormal heart beat and triggering the alarm    m  The monitor can conduct up to 13 different arrhythmia analyses    mM The monitor can store the latest 60 alarm events when taking arrhythmia analysis to a  peculiar buffer  The operator can edit these arrhythmia events through the menu below    Pick the item ARR ANALYSIS in ECG SETUP menu to access the ARR ANALYSIS sub menu     ARR ANALYSIS Menu    ARR ANALYSIS    ARR ANAL OFF v  ALM HI 10    PUCs AL
5.       Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     CO2 Monitoring       CO2 FORWARD                               FLOW HIGH  CO2 MALFUNCTION HIGH  CO2 BAROMETRIC  HIGH HIGH  CO2 BAROMETRIC  LOW HIGH  Stop using measuring  function of CO2  CO2 COMM ERR CO2 module communication HIGH module  notify  failure biomedical engineer  or Mindray service  staff   CO2 module is not properly Stop using measuring  COR INITERR connected or failed  aN function of CO2  module  notify  Measuring module failure or biomedical engineer  E communication failure  Hien or Mindray service  staff   CO2 ALM LMT ERR Functional safety failure HIGH Stop using measuring  function of CO2  INS ALM LMT ERR Functional safety failure HIGH module  notify  biomedical engineer  AWRR ALM LMT ERR Functional safety failure HIGH oF Mindray service    staff        Prompt message           Message Cause Alarm Level  Turn from measuring mode to  CO2 STANDBY STATUS standby mode  making the module No alarm  in energy saving status   CO2 WARM UP Shows that the sensor is in EES SE  warming up stage   CO2 SENSOR START UP Shows that the sensor has just No al  rm    entering start up stage        18 5 Maintenance and Cleaning    H Care and Maintenance    ech    another patient       Sample line is for one off use in SideStream module  Do not sterilize or clean for reuse on    2  Airway adapter is for one off use in MainStream module  Do not sterilize or clean for reuse    on another patient     ao      When the sample system of S
6.      6PIN 3 lead ECG cable and lead wires assembly  Deffibrilation   IEC  Mindray     6PIN separable ECG trunk cable assembly  Mindray   6PIN separable ECG trunk cable assembly  Defibrillation   Mindray     m Lead wires    3 lead ECG lead wire LL 22363  EURO 5 lead ECG lead wire  KENDALL     P N 0509 10 00093  P N 6000 10 02006  P N 6000 10 02007  P N 9000 10 05163  P N 9000 30 07339  P N 0010 30 12240  P N 0010 30 12241  P N 0010 30 12242  P N 0010 30 12243    P N 0010 30 12244    P N 0010 30 12245    P N 0010 30 12246    P N 0010 30 12247    P N 0010 30 12256  P N 0010 30 12257    P N 9000 10 07445  P N 9000 30 07338       Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     20 1    Accessories and Ordering Information    3 lead ECG lead wire  EURO  KENDALL    5 lead separable ECG lead wire  AHA  PINCH  Mindray   3 lead separable ECG lead wire  AHA  PINCH  Mindray   5 lead separable ECG lead wire  IEC  PINCH  Mindray   3 lead separable ECG lead wire  IEC  PINCH  Mindray   5 lead separable ECG lead wire  AHA  SNAP  Mindray   3 lead separable ECG lead wire  AHA  SNAP  Mindray   5 lead separable ECG lead wire  IEC  SNAP  Mindray   3 lead separable ECG lead wire  IEC  SNAP  Mindray     m Electrodes    ECG electrode  Medi Trace 230    ECG electrode  Medi Trace 210   KENDALL      ECG electrode  2249 3M    Pediatric ECG electrode  2248 3M   Pediatric electrode  2258 3 3M     20 2 SpO  Accessories    m MASIMO ACCESSORIES     1269 LNOP DCI ADULT SENSOR KIT    1269 LNOP DCI ADULT REUSABLE SENS
7.      menu  the volume of PITCH TONE will be controlled by    PR SOUND    in    SPO2 SETUP     menu  If other item than    SPO2    is selected as    HR SOURCE    in    ECG SETUP    menu  the  volume of PITCH TONE will be consequently controlled by    BEAT SOUND    in    ECG SETUP     MENU     A NoteA    When SPO2 module is switched OFF  PITCH TONE function will become disabled  automatically     13 1 3 Sensors and Accessories     Before use  carefully read the LNOP sensor Directions for Use    Use only Masimo oximetry sensors for SpO2 measurements  Other oxygen transducers or  sensors may cause improper Radical Pulse Oximeter performance    Tissue damage can be caused by incorrect application or use of an LNOP sensor  for  example by wrapping the sensor too tightly  Inspect he sensor site as directed in he sensor  Directions for Use to ensure skin integrity and correct positioning and adhesion of he sensor     AN Caution AN    Do not use the damaged sensors  Do not use a sensor with exposed optical  components  Do not immerse the sensor in water  solvents  or cleaning solutions   the sensors and connectors are not waterproof    Do not sterilize by irradiation        13 8 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     SpO   Monitoring    steam  or ethylene oxide     AN Caution AN    Do not use damaged patient cables  Do not immerse the patient cables in water   solvents  or cleaning solutions  the sensors and connectors are not waterproof     Do not sterilize by irradiation  steam 
8.     ARR RECALL    171       Puc   12 61 2061    BIGEMINY 12 01 2001  UFIBZUTAC 12 01 2001  ASYSTOLE 12 01 2001  BIGEMINY 12 01 2001    VFIB UTAC 12 61 2661  MISSED BEATS 12 01 2001  MISSED BEATS 12 01 2001  PUC 12 01 2001  TACHY 12 01 2001    UP DOUN CURSOR WAVE  gt  gt  DELETE RENAME    Back to the upper menu     L o    Figure 12 14 ARR RECALL Menu    O UP DOWN Observe other event lists of other page   o CURSOR Select the Arr  event  whose name is displayed in a protruding frame   O DELETE Delete the selected Arr  event   O RENAME Rename the selected Arr  event  whose name is displayed in a  sunken frame   Switch the knob until the name you want appears   o WAVE To display the Arrhythmia waveform  time and parameter value   o  UP DOWN To observe waveforms of other Arrhythmia events   o L RIGHT To observe 8 second waveform of Arrhythmia events   o REC To print out displayed Arrhythmia event   o EXIT To return to ARR RECALL menu of Arrhythmia event        12 18 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     ECG RESP Monitoring    ARR WAVE RECALL    BIGEMINY  ECG  276    0  00     29    12 01 2001 17 02  IBPA  CH1 CH2  s    1712  IBPB  CH1 CH2 SYS    ER MEAN    SP02    SPO2      PR         L RIGHT REC    NIBP    Select previous or next Arr  waveform     AN Note A    EXIT    Figure 12 15 ARR WAVE RECALL Menu    If there are more than 60 Arrhythmia events  the latest will be retained     ARR ALARM    The alarm is triggered when an Arrhythmia occurs  If the ALM is ON  the alarm sounds
9.     EEN 12 6  12 5 EGG MENU EE 12 7  12 6 ECG Alarm Information and Prompt  12 11  12 7 ST Segment Monitoring  optional   12 12  12 8 Arr  Monitoring  optional  12 16  12 9 Measuring RESP orini araa aeiaai aa eaa aa aa er a ad aaae aea aa aaaea tis 12 20  12 10 Maintenance and Cleaning     12 24  Chapter 13 SpO2 Monitoring            ccccccsccesseeeeseeeeeeeeeseaeenseeeeeeeeescaeseneeeeeseeeseneseseaeseeeeeeeeas 13 1  13 1 PART 1  MASIMO SpO2 board configuration               cccccceeeeeteeceeeeseteeeeneeteeeeees 13 1  132127 ele 13 3  135172 Monitoring  Procedure e sctiteceeccokie ce sceektey seth lege EEEa Aa EAER AE 13 5  13 1 3 Sensors and Accessories       0    cccceeececeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeseaeeesaeeeeeeeeeeeees 13 8  13 1 4 Alarm Description and Prompt  s AAA 13 11  13 1 5 Masimo Intormaion  13 13  13 2 PART 2  MINDRAY SpO2 board configuration              ccccceceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 13 14  13 2 1 What is SpO2 Monitortmg  cee ceeeeeeeeeee cence eeaceeeeeeeceaeeeeaaeeeeaeeseeeeesiaaeeeeaeeeeaes 13 14  13 2 2 Precautions during SpO2 Pulse Monitoring              cccccceseeeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeesaees 13 15  13 2 3 Monitoring Proc  dure           cceeeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeenaaeeeeneaaes 13 16       2 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     Content                            13 2 4 Limitations for Measurement 13 18  1 3 2  5 Sp 2 Mem eege naa aa niacin aa a iaia 13 18  13 2 6 Alarm Description and Prompt  13 20  13
10.     Verify that the transducer for CH1 does not fall off  then execute zeroing  If problem  still exists  contact the serviceman   m    IN DEMO FAIL     Ensure that the monitor is not in DEMO mode  Contact the serviceman if necessary   m    PRESSURE OVER RANGE  FALL     Ensure that the venting stopcock is opened to atmosphere  then execute zeroing  If  the problem still exists  replace the transducer and contact the serviceman   m    PULSATILE PRESSURE  FALL     Ensure that the transducer is not opened to the patient and the stopcock is vented to  atmosphere  Then execute zeroing  If the problem still exists  contact the serviceman     IBP Calibration    Pick IBP PRESSURE CALIBRATE in the IBP  1 2  SELECT menu to popup IBP PRESSURE  CALIBRATE menu as shown below     IBP PRESSURE CALIBRATE    CH1 CAL VALUE 200   CALIBRATE    200   200   08 10 2001 00 07 00  CH2 CAL VALUE 200   CALIBRATE    200   144   08 10 2001 00 00 00    Back to the upper menu     Figure 16 6 IBP Calibration Menu    Calibrate the transducer   Turn the knob to select the item CH1 CAL VALUE  press and turn the knob to select the       16 6 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     IBP Monitoring    pressure value to be calibrated for channel 1  Then turn the knob to select CALIBRATE to  start calibrating channel 1    Turn the knob to select the item CH2 CAL VALUE  press and turn the knob to select the  pressure value to be calibrated for channel 2  Then turn the knob to select CALIBRATE to  start calibrating
11.     dh    ALM LEV MED   AWRR ALM LO 8       gt     ALM REC OFF   APNEA ALM 20S      c02 ALM HI 50   SWEEP FC EE  c02 ALM LO 15   UNIT mmHg v  INS ALM HI 4 Ka OTHER SETUP  gt  gt   Open or close the COZ alarm    EXIT    Figure 18 3 COs  Setup Menu    Following functions can be realized via CO2 SETUP menu     ALM  select    ON    to enable and store alarm prompt when CO2 parameters have alarms   Select    OFF    to disable alarm and display   amp  beside CO2  The default is    ON       ALM REC  select    ON    to generate output from the recorder ever since CO2 parameter  alarm occurs  The default is    OFF       ALM LEV  select from HIGH  MED and LOW  Level HIGH represents the most serious  alarm  followed by Level MED and Level LOW with a decrease of seriousness  Change in     ALM LEV    can only affect the physiological alarm levels of CO2 parameters including  EtCO2 upper limit  EtCO2 lower limit  InsCO2 upper limit  AwRR upper limit and AwRR  lower limit  The default alarm level is    MED       CO2 ALM HI  to adjust the upper alarm limit of EtCO2  If the measuring value is larger  than CO2 upper alarm limit     CO2 TOO HIGH    appears on the screen  After the  measuring value returns to the normal one  the information disappears    CO2 ALM LO  to adjust the lower alarm limit of EtCO2  If the measuring value is smaller  than CO2 lower alarm limit     CO2 TOO LOW    appears on the screen  After the measuring  value returns to the normal one  the information disappears    INS
12.    12 9 4 RESP menu    RESP SETUP Menu    Pick RESP hot key on the screen to call up the following menu     ALM SWEEP 12 5      ALM LEU MED v WAVE AMP 1 X  ALM REC OFF    4    HOLD TYPE AUTO      ALM HI 30  gt  HOLD HI  ALM LO 8   HOLD LO  APNEA ALM 205   DEFAULT  gt  gt     Open or close the RESP alarn     EXIT    Figure 12 17 RESP SETUP Menu    RESP alarm setting   e ALM  pick  ON  to enable prompt message and data record during the RESP alarm  pick   OFF  to disable the alarm function  and there will be a 2 beside    RESP       e ALM REC  pick  ON  to enable report printing upon RESP alarm    e ALM LEV  selectable from HIGH  MED and LOW  Level HIGH represents the most serious  case    e ALM HI  used to set up the upper alarm limit    e ALM LO  used to set up the lower alarm limit   RESP alarm is activated when the respiration rate exceeds set ALM HI value or falls below  ALM LO value    RESP alarm limits        Max  RR HI Min  RR LO Step  RESP ADU 120 0 1  RESP NEO PED 150 0 1    e APNEA ALM  to set the standard of judging an apnea case  It ranges from 10 to 40  seconds  increases   decreases by 5    e SWEEP  Available options for RESP SWEEP are 6 25  12 5 and 25 0 mm s    e WAVE AMP  The user may set up the displaying amplitude of the RESP waveform  The  selections are 0 25  0 5  1  2  3  4  5     e HOLD TYPE  AUTO MANUAL adjustable  When it is AUTO mode  HOLD HI and HOLD LO       12 22 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     ECG RESP Monitoring    menus cannot be used
13.    DISPLAY WAY 1 GROUP    ALM LEV MED   UNIT mmHg    ALM REC OFF   INTERVAL MANUAL    SYS ALM HI 160   RESET   SYS ALM LO 900   CONT INUAL   MEAN ALM HI 110   CALIBRATE   MEAN ALM LO 60   PNEUMATIC   DIA ALM HI gJ     DEFAULT  gt  gt     DIA ALM LO 50      Open or close the NIBP alarm     EXIT  Figure 14 2 NIBP SETUP Menu    NIBP alarm setting    e ALM  pick  ON  to enable prompt message and data record during the NIBP alarm   pick  OFF  to disable the alarm function  and there will be a 28 beside    NIBP            Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  14 5    NIBP Monitoring    e ALM LEV  selectable from HIGH  MED to LOW  HIGH represents the most serious  case    e ALM REC  pick  ON  to enable report printing upon NIBP alarm    e SYS ALM HI  SYS ALM LOW  MEAN ALM HI  MEAN ALM LO  DIA ALM HI  DIA ALM  LO are for the user to set up the alarm limit for each type of pressure  NIBP alarm is  activated when the pressure exceeds set upper alarm limits or falls below lower alarm  limits     NIBP alarm limits     Adult Mode   SYS 40 270 mmHg   DIA 10 210 mmHg   Mean 20 230 mmHg  Pediatric Mode   SYS 40 200 mmHg   DIA 10 150 mmHg   Mean 20 165 mmHg  Neonatal Mode   SYS 40 135 mmHg   DIA 10 95 mmHg   Mean 20 105 mmHg  RESET  Restore measurement status   Pick this item to restore initial settings of the pressure pump   When the pressure does not work properly and the system fails to give message for the  problem  pick this item to activate self test procedure  thus restore the system
14.    Figure 12 8 ADJUST WAVE POS menu    DEFAULT  pick this item to access the ECG DEFAULT CONFIG dialog box  in which the  user may select whether the FACTORY DEFAULT CONFIG or the USER DEFAULT  CONFIG is to be used  After selecting any of the items and exiting the dialog box  the  system will pop up the dialog box asking for the user   s confirmation     A Warning A    For pacemaker patient  the pacing impulse analysis function must be switched on        12 10 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     ECG RESP Monitoring    otherwise  the pacing impulse may be counted as normal QRS complex  which results  in failure of    ECG LOST    error detection     WH For monitor with ST segment  amp  Arrhythmia analysis software  refer to ST Segment  Monitoring and Arrhythmia Analysis for details     A Note A    When Pacer Switch is On  the Arrhythmia events related to PVCs will not be monitored   At the same time  the ST analysis will not be performed either     12 6 ECG Alarm Information and Prompt    Alarm Message    Alarms occurring in the process of ECG measurement contain two types  physiological alarm  and technical alarm  Prompt message may also appear in the mean time  For the audio and  visual features during the appearance of these alarms and prompt messages in the process  of ECG measurement  please refer to the related description in Chapter Alarm  In the screen   physiological alarm messages and the prompt messages able to trigger alarms  general alerts   all displayed in
15.    awRR  1 rpm  Alarm range  CO  0 10   0 76 mmHg   awRR 2 100 rpm  Suffocation Alarm Delay  awRR 20 40 Sec   Updating frequency  once per second  Calibrate  no specified calibrate regulations  AG calibrate stability  after being used for consecutive 12 months  the  deviation from precision is  lt  1   Rising time  240ms  10    90     Delay time  1 12 seconds maximum with 7 feet long sampling line    and ID 0 055 inch    Sample rate is 175 ml min       Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  9       Appendix Ill    EMC    The monitor meets the requirements of EN 60601 1 2 2001    A Note A    The monitor needs special precautions regarding EMC and needs to be installed and  put into service according to the EMC information provided below     A Note A    Portable and mobile RF communications equipment can affect this monitor  See tables  1 2 3  and 4 below     TABLE 1          Guidance and manufacturer   s declaration     electromagnetic emmissions    The monitor is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below  The  customer or the user of the monitor should assure that it is used in such an environment     Emissions test Electromagnetic environment     guidance  The MONITOR uses RF energy only for its internal  RF emissions Group function  Therefore  its RF emissions are very low and  CISPR 11 H are not likely to cause any interference in nearby  electronic equipment   RF emissions          The MONITOR is suitable for use in all establishments  Harmonic 
16.    function is switched off at the same time   3 4 5 Recorder setup    Select the  RECORD  in the    SYSTEM SETUP    menu to call up the following menu     RECORD    REC WAVE1 SP02 A  REC WAVEZ IBP1 Se  RT REC TIME 85 T  TIMING REC TIME OFF z  REC RATE 25 0 ki  REC GRID ON      CLEAR REC TASK    Back to the upper menu     Figure 3 11 Record Setup       Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  3 7    System Menu    A Note A    In the USER    MAINTAIN menu  If the AUX OUTPUT item being selected with NURSE    CALL  the AUX OUTPUT port will be used to realize NURSE CALL function while     ANALOG OUT    function is switched off at the same time     In this menu     the user can set up to output two waveforms  The waveforms that can be    selected include     ECG1   ECG6    SPO2  IBP1    IBP2    RESP    CO2  AG    The first to the seventh ECG waveform on the screen  there are seven ECG  waveforms in full leads display  If no ECG waveform is currently displayed on  the screen  this item cannot be picked     SpO2 Plethysmogram    The first IBP waveform on the screen  If no IBP waveform is currently displayed  on the screen  this item cannot be picked     The second IBP waveform on the screen  If less than two IBP waveforms are  currently displayed on the screen  this item cannot be picked     RESP waveform  If no RESP waveform is currently displayed on the screen   this item cannot be picked     Displayed waveform either of anesthetic gas or generated by CO2 module     CO2 02 N2O anes
17.    m Select trend parameter    If multiple parameters are located at the same position on the trend graph  by selecting  the corresponding hot key of a parameter on the trend graph  you can have the trend  graph of this parameter displayed on the screen  For example  in ECG trend graph   you can select hot keys such as HR  ST or PVCs  then the system will display their  corresponding trend graphs respectively     H Close trend screen    In the    FACE SELECT    menu  select options of other operating screens to close the  Trend Screen     oxyCRG Screen    m   Enter oxyCRG screen    In the    FACE SELECT    menu  select the    oxyCRG SCREEN    to enter the oxyCRG  Screen     BED No 1 ADU D  nn Zhang shan M    oxyGRG     805s  RESP WAVE       Figure 4 4 oxyCRG SCREEN  H Trend graph of oxyCRG screen    Located at the lower part of the screen  oxyCRG screen consists of three trends  HR       Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  4 3    Face Select    Trend  SpO2 Trend and RR Trend or Compressed Resp  Waveform   H Select OxyCRG trend length    Three are three hot keys at the bottom part of the oxyCRG Screen  which are  4MIN 2MIN 1MIN  RR RESP WAVE  and REC     By using hot keys for trend time  you may select to display trend graphs of three  different lengths  i e   1 min  2 min and 4 min     H Select RR trend or Compressed Resp  Waveform    By using the hot keys for RR RESP WAVE  you may select either RR trend graph or  compressed Resp  Wave  They occupy the same position  Ther
18.   3    Production Specification    Baseline Recovery  ECG Signal Range  Bandwidth  Surgery  Monitor  Diagnostic  Calibration Signal  ST Segment Monitoring Range  Measure and Alarm  ARR Detecting    Type    Alarm    Review    2 9 RESPARATION    Method  Differential input Impedance   Measuring Impedance Range   Base line Impedance Range   Bandwidth  Resp Rate  Measuring and Alarm Range  Adult  Neo Ped  Resolution  Accuracy  Apean Alarm    2 10 NIBP    Method  Mode  Measuring Interval in AUTO Mode    Measuring Period in STAT Mode  Pulse Rate Range  Alarm   Type     lt 3 S  After Defi     8  mV  p p    1 15 Hz   0 5   35 Hz   0 05   100 Hz   1  mV  p p   5  Accuracy     2 0    2 0  mV     ASYSTOLE  VFIB VTAC  COUPLET  BIGEMINY   TRIGEMINY  R ON T  VT gt 2  PVC  TACHY  BRADY     MISSED BEATS  PNP  PNC    Available  Available    Impedance between RA LL   gt 2 5 MOhm  0 3 5 0Q  200Q   25000  0 2   2Hz   3 dB           use 1kQ  of ECG cable                      0   120  rpm   0   150  rpm   1  rpm     2  rpm    10   40  s     Oscillometric  Manual  Auto  STAT    1  2  3  4  5  10  15  30  60  90  120  180  240  480 min  5  Min   40   240  bpm     SYS  DIA  MEAN       4 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     Measuring and alarm range    Adult Mode  SYS  DIA  MEAN  Pediatric Mode  SYS  DIA  MEAN  Neonatal Mode  SYS  DIA  MEAN  Resolution  Pressure  Accuracy  Pressure    Maximum Mean error    Production Specification    40   270 mmHg  10   210 mmHg  20   230 mmHg    40   200 mmHg  1
19.   NET INIT ERR Ram             NET INIT ERR Reg         The network part in the system  has failure  The system cannot  be linked to the net        Contact the manufacturer for  repair           Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4        System Alarm Prompt        NET INIT ERR Mii          NET INIT ERR Loop          NET ERR Run1          NET ERR Run2          NET ERR Run3             5V TOO HIGH         5V TOO LOW         POWER ERR3         POWER ERR4         12V TOO HIGH         12V TOO LOW         POWER ERR7         POWER ERR8         3 3V TOO HIGH         3 3V TOO LOW     The power part of the system  has failure     If the prompt  repeatedly  contact  manufacturer for repair     appears  the        CELL BAT TOO HIGH     Cell battery has problem         CELL BAT TOO LOW     The cell battery has low  capacity or the cell battery is  not installed or the connection  is loose     Replace the battery  If the  failure still exists  contact the  manufacturer            RECORDER SELFTEST    During the selftest  the system    Execute    Clear Record Task     function in the recorder setup  menu to re connect the host       ERR  fails connecting with the and the recorder  If the failure  recorder module  i    still exists  contact the  manufacturer for repair    RECORDER VLT HIGH  The recorder module has   Contact the manufacturer for        RECORDER VLT LOW     voltage failure     repair         RECORDER HEAD HOT     The continuous recording time  may be too long     After the 
20.   ON  to enable report printing upon ECG alarm    e ALM HI  used to set up the upper limit of ECG alarm    e ALM LO  used to set up the lower limit of ECG alarm    ECG alarm is activated when the heart beat exceeds set ALM HI value or falls below          ALM LO value   ECG alarm limits   Max  ALM HI Min  ALM LO Step  HR ADU 300 15 1  HR PED 350 15 1  HR NEO 350 15 1  A Note A    Please set the alarm limits according to clinical condition of individual patient  The  upper limit shall not exceed 20 beat min higher than the patient s heart rate     m HR FROM   ECG  SpO2  AUTO and BOTH may detect heart rate  AUTO distinguishes heart rate  source according to the quality of signal  By picking ECG  the monitor prompts HR and  activates HR beep  By picking SpO   the monitor prompts PULSE and activates pulse beep   BOTH mode displays HR and PR simultaneously  when this item is picked  PR parameter is  displayed to the right side of SoO2  As for the sound of HR or PR in BOTH mode  HR is given  the priority  i e   if HR is available  whose sound will be sent out  but if HR is not available        12 8 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     ECG RESP Monitoring    then the sound will be for PR     HR CHANNEL    CH1  to count the heart rate by CH 1 waveform    CH2  to count the heart rate by CH 2 waveform    AUTO  the monitor selects a channel automatically   LEAD TYPE  used to select either 5 LEADS or 3 LEADS    SWEEP   Available options for ECG SWEEP are 12 5  25 0  and 50 0 mm s  
21.   Optional Accessory      16 7 1 Introduction    The ICT B is one of catheter tip transducers manufactured by Gaeltec  It is designed for  measuring intracranial pressure by the epidural method  There are many advantages of  catheter tip measurement including simplicity of use and excellent frequency response  without artefacts        16 12 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     IBP Monitoring    The ICT B has an atmospheric reference pressure channel that connects the back of the  sensing area to the ambient air pressure via the luer fitting on the connector  All  measurements are differential with respect to ambient air pressure     SS Reference channel to  Luer fitting for        ambient air pressure    Measured Calibration   zero check by Extension       pressure sleeve balloon inflation Y Transducer drive    iH    sensor Temperature compensation and Output signal    bridge balance network    Figure 16 9 ICT B transducer  A significant feature of the ICT B is the ability to check the zero drift of the ICT B and pressure  monitor in vivo  Not only does this allow for accurate measurements  but also allow moving  the patient with the ICT B in the epidural space and reconnection to another monitor quickly  and easily     There is a flat silicone rubber membrane  or balloon  covering the pressure sensing  diaphragm  Two internal tubes connect the two sides of the diaphragm to a female luer fitting  on the connector shell  By introducing approximately 0 2 to 0 3ml of air f
22.   SSS    Figure 19 7 AG DEFAULT CONFIG    m FACTORY DEFAULT CONFIG  use the factory default configuration to initialize  menu items    m USER DEFAULT CONFIG  use the user default configuration to initialize menu  items    m EXIT  used to exit this menu     19 4 Alarm information and prompts    When the alarm record switch in a related menu is on  those physiological alarms caused by  the parameter value exceeding the alarm limits will trigger the recorder to automatically output  this parameter value and its related measured waveforms     Physiological and technical alarms and prompts that may appear during AG monitoring are  listed in following tables     Physiological alarms     Message Cause Alarm level    The measured FiCO  value exceeds                            FiCO2 HIGH the setup upper alarm limit  User selectable  FiCO2 LOW ee ee is below User selectable  EtCO2 HIGH e See a bi EE User selectable  EtCO2 LOW e in ms is below User selectable  FiO2 HIGH e dare exceeds the User selectable  FiO2 LOW ed is below the   Leet selectable  EtO2 HIGH ec Ee exceede User selectable  EtO2 LOW as ieee hoa is below User selectable  FiN20 HIGH The measured FiN O value exceeds User selectable          Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  19 9    Anesthetic Gas Measurement       the setup upper alarm limit        FiN20 LOW    The measured FiN2O value is below  the setup lower alarm limit     User selectable       EtN20 HIGH    The measured EtN2O value exceeds  the setup upper alarm l
23.   ST ANALYSIS   Pick this item to access ST ANALYSIS menu  the detailed information about the menu is  to be discussed in the following section    ARR ANALYSIS   Pick this item to access ARR ANALYSIS menu  the detailed information about the menu  is to be discussed in the following section    OTHER SETUP   Pick this item to access ECG SETUP menu as shown below     ECG DISPLAY   HALF SCN FULL LEADS sl    BEAT VOL 2 S ECG CAL  PACE OFF   ADJUST WAVE POS  gt  gt   CASCADE OFF   DEFAULT  gt  gt     Select general or full lead ECG  monitoring way     EXIT    Figure 12 7 ECG SETUP menu    In the sub menu  following functions are available    ECG DISPLAY  Select NORMAL DISPLAY to display 2 ECG waveforms for 5 lead  for  3 lead  only 1 ECG waveform is displayed    Select MULTI LEADS DISPLAY  the  waveform area on the screen displays 6 ECG waveforms  Select HALF SCAN  MULTI LEADS  there are 4 ECG waveforms are displayed on the screen    Note  If 3 LEADS is selected in the ECG SETUP menu  only NORMAL DISPLAY can be  selected for ECG DISPLAY item in the sub menu    BEAT VOL   The options are from    3    to    0        3    indicates the maximum volume while    0    the  minimum     A Note A    PITCH TONE volume is controlled through adjusting the heart beat volume  However  if  SPO2 is selected as    HR FROM    in    ECG SETUP     the PITCH TONE volume will  accordingly controlled through adjusting    PR SOUND    in    SPO2 SETUP    menu  Refer       Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 
24.   SiS REVIGW AE A E E E E EAE 3 4  3 4 System Setup  TEEN 3 4  EE ee EE 3 11  3 6 Monitor VErSION  20 EEN EES etna 3 12  327 Ri ie Ree le TEE 3 12  8 8 Maintenance x eevee cea te sees Qed  Bechet vee Needed ea a a ae eae od 3 13  8 9 DEMO FUNCION  E 3 16  Chapter 4  Face Geleet  edu EE ENEE EEN EE eEe 4 1  4 1 Select Operating Screen   2     eeececec ceeeceeeececeeeeeeaeeeeaaeeeeneeecaaeseenaeseeeeseaeeeeaaeeseneeesaees 4 1  4 2 Standatd Re MEN 4 1  4 3  Trend  SCL Mic  sdassciess e die EAE NARESE AAA RARE E AAA A 4 2  4 4 E ER EE 4 3  4 5  Ee Sereen aars Reese eea n Ea RAEE eraa R ERa E RAE a Ra EARR E EERS eR 4 4  Chapter 5  Alati anini esga asoeio raaa aaar Aasaa da eCE 5 1  SPAM EE 5 1  5 2 Alarm verification during power on  5 4  RRE RT EE E 5 4  5 4 SILENCE and PAUSE ich acesial iva nite EENEG 5 5  5 5 lun EE 5 6  5 6 When an Alarm    ICHTEN Ee ee AE dE 5 6  Chapter 6    Fre Ze a e ege ee ee Eed 6 1  Gl GEM OT al een E cede cle dee dEr asec Qiu dE dd geg 6 1  6 2 Enter Exit Freeze Gtaius erare tr nert tr rnst tntnnnttr annt tn anattar annt tn anneer aneren nnen 6 1  623 FroZe n Ment giia nnn uta e nannaa evento ad eaa aaea Bee ae ede 6 2       Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  1    Content    6 4 Reviewing Frozen Waveform           ccccccececeececeeeeeeeceeeeeceaeeesaaeeesaaeseeeeeseaeeestaeeseneeenaees 6 3  6 5 Recording Frozen Waveform           cccscccececceceeeeeeeeeceeeeeceeeesaaeessaaeseeeeeseaeeeseaeeseneeeeaees 6 3  Chapter 7 RECOrGIING  eege EENS e errand
25.   air way respiration rate  respiring time per minute   MAC   minimum alveolar concentration   Halothame  HAL   Isoflurane   ISO   Enflurane   ENF    Sevoflurane  SEV  Desflurane   DES    Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  19 1    Anesthetic Gas Measurement    BED NO 1 ADU KEEN    AG value       Figure 19 1 AG measurement display    A Note AN    The system can only display the waveform and value of one anesthetic agent at one  time     19 2 Measuring principle and operating process    Principle for measuring anesthetic gas     Anesthetic gas can absorb infrared ray  By using this principle  we can measure the  concentration of anesthetic gas     Gases that can be measured using    AG module    are all able to absorb infrared ray  Besides   each gas has it own absorption characteristic  First the gas to be measured is driven into a  sample cell  Then optic infrared filter selects the infrared ray with special wavelength to  penetrate this gas  For a given volume  the higher the gas concentration is  the more infrared  rays are absorbed  This means that the higher the concentration of the absorbed infrared is   the fewer infrared rays there are to have penetrated the gas  We may first measure the  quantity of the infrared rays that have penetrated the gas and then calculate the gas  concentration via specialized formula  If you desire to measure multiple gases  you should  install various infrared filters in the AG module     Principle for measuring oxygen     Within the r
26.   level MED to level LOW  Level HIGH  represents the most serious case      TB ALM HI and TB ALM LO  used to set up the upper and lower alarm limit for TB   Alarm occurs when the measured TB exceeds set alarm high limit or falls below  alarm low limit     TB alarm limits   Max  Alarm High Min  Alarm Low Step  TB 43  C 23  C 0 1  C       m CO CONST  It represents the computation constant related to the catheter and injectate volume  After  replacing the catheter  you should adjust this constant according to the instruction     A Warning A    Make sure that the computational constant for the measurement is appropriate to the  catheter used        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  17 7    CO Measuring    INT TIME s  It refers to the minimum time interval between two measurements   It is in second unit  The adjustment range is 5 to 300 seconds with  the increment being 5 seconds     INJ  TEMP FROM Pick    ON    or    OFF    to select from two ways of obtaining the  injectate temperature   ON  the system obtains the injectate temperature through    sampling   OFF  directly display the injectate temperature obtains from the  INJ  TEMP item   INJ  TEMP When the INJ  TEMP FROM is OFF  the user can set the injectate  temperature between 0     27  C with the increment being 0 1  C   TEMP UNIT    C for Celsius degree       F    for Fahrenheit degree     m DEFAULT  pick this item to access the CO DEFAULT CONFIG dialog box  in which the  user may select whether the FACTORY DEFAULT C
27.   oscillometric method    It is applicable for adult  pediatric  and neonatal usage    There are three modes of measurement available  manual  automatic and continuous    Each mode displays the diastolic  systolic and mean blood pressure    O Inthe MANUAL mode  only one measurement is conducted for each time    O In the AUTO mode  the measurement is cycled  you can set the interval time to  1 2 3 4 5 1 0 15 30 60 90 1 20 1 80 240 480 minutes        O Inthe continuous mode  the monitor measures the blood pressure as many times as  possible in five minutes     A Warning A    1     You must not perform NIBP measurements on patients with sickle cell disease or   under any condition which the skin is damaged or expected to be damaged      For a thrombasthemia patient  it is important to determine whether measurement of  the blood pressure shall be done automatically  The determination should be based  on the clinical evaluation      Ensure that the correct setting is selected when performing measurements on   children  It may be dangerous for the children to use an over pressure level     14 2 NIBP Monitoring    14 2 1 NIBP Measuring  A Warning A    Before starting a measurement  verify that you have selected a setting appropriate  for your patient  adult  pediatric or neonate     Do not apply the cuff to a limb that has an intravenous infusion or catheter in  place  This could cause tissue damage around the catheter when infusion is  slowed or blocked during cuff inflation       
28.  12 1     ECG RESP Monitoring    Red  R  electrode   Be placed near the right shoulder  directly below the clavicle   Yellow  L  electrode   Be placed near the left shoulder  directly below the clavicle   Black  N  electrode   Be placed on the right hypogastrium   Green  F  electrode   Be placed on the left hypogastrium   White  C  electrode   Be placed on the chest as illustrated in the F Figure 12 2    Note  the following table gives the corresponding lead names used in Europe and America  respectively   Lead names are represented by R  L  N  F and C respectively in Europe  whose  corresponding lead names in America are RA  LA  RL  LL and V                     America Euro  Lead names color Lead names color  RA White R Red  LA Black L Yellow  LL Red F Green  RL Green N Black  V brown C White       LA  Black    LL  Red    Figure 12 1 Electrode placement for 5 lead set    A Note A       Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     ECG RESP Monitoring    To ensure patient safety  all leads must be attached to the patient     For 12 lead set  attach the C electrode to one of the indicated positions as below  Figure  12 2      gw Vi On the 4th intercostal space at the right sterna margin    E V2 On the 4th intercostal space at the left sterna margin    E V3 Midway between V2 and V4 electrodes    mg V4 On the 5th intercostal space at the left clavicular line    m V5 On the left anterior axillary line  horizontal with V4 electrode    E V6 On the left middle axillary line  horizontal
29.  2 7 Maintenance and Cleaning  13 22  Chapter 14 NIBP Monitoring              ccccseccsseeeeseeeeeeeeeesneeeeseeeeeeeeescaeseseeeeeeeeeeseaeseneenenseeeneas 14 1   E Ali tele ele EE 14 1   E Eelere WEE 14 1  14 3 NIBP SETUP men    14 5  14 4 NIBP Alarm Message  ensten o rae Ra E R a E SAREES 14 8  14 5 Maintenance and Ceamimg  14 10  Chapter 15 TEMP Monitor inng             cccccscccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeseneesnsneeeeeneescaeseseeenseeeseseseneenenseeeees 15 1  15 31  CEMP Monitoring  is  auras  teenaged ioe aetna cae eee 15 1  15 2 TEMP SETUP  En E 15 2  15 3 TEMP Alarm message  15 3  15 4 Care and Cleaning   0      cceescecececeeeeeceeeaeeeeneeceaeeesaaaeseneecaeeseaaeseeaaesseeeeseaeeesaeeseneees 15 4  Chapter 16 IBP Monitoring             cccseecseseeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeenseeeeeeeeeseaeseseeenseeeeseaesaseeeeneeeenes 16 1  1631  INtrOdUCtION  242   Aden et dane  teat atari dat at dana 16 1  16 2 Precautions during IBP Monttormg   16 1  16 3 Monitoring ProCeCure A 16 2  16 4  IBP Meni oia raer ann tae eeh ennai inated 16 3  16 5 Alarm Information and Prompts               cecsceceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeaaeseeeeeseaeeessaeeseneees 16 9  16 6 Maintenance and Ceanimg  16 11  16 7 ICP Transducer ICT B    Optional Accessory           cceccceseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaees 16 12  Chapter 17 CO Measuring  insisi eaoaai aoa aeeoa ea ea iaaea paean aeaaea 17 1  ORT E E 17 1  17 2 Monitoring Procedure AA 17 1  IAS CO ER BEE 17 6  17 4 Hemodynamic Calculaton   17 8  17 5 Alarm Informat
30.  3 2 cm 1 5mor  3 5 8   10 9 cm 4 3 cm 3m  4 7 1   13 1 cm 5 1 cm          14 2 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     6     NIBP Monitoring    Make sure that the cuff edge falls within the range of mark  lt   gt   If it does not  use a larger  or smaller cuff that fits better    Connect the cuff to the air hose  The limb chosen for taking the measurement should be  placed at the same level as the patient s heart  If this is not possible you should apply the  following corrections to the measured values    If the cuff is placed higher than the heart level  add 0 75 mmHg  0 10 kPa  for each inch  of difference    If it is placed lower than the heart level  deduct 0 75 mmHg  0 10 kPa  for each inch of  difference    Check whether the patient mode is appropriately selected  Access PATIENT SETUP  menu from SYSTEM MENU and pick PAT TYPE item and turn the knob to select the  required patient type    Select a measurement mode in the NIBP SETUP menu  Refer to the following  paragraphs Operation Hints for details   Press the START button on the front panel to start a measurement     Operation Hints    1     To start auto measuring    Access NIBP SETUP menu and pick the INTERVAL item  in which the user may choose  the selections other than MANUAL to set up the time interval for auto measurement  After  that  press START button on the front panel to start the auto measuring according to the  selected time interval     A Warning A    Prolonged non invasive blood pressure measurements
31.  30 rpm  APNEA Time  Selections are 10S to 40S   Default  20S   Work Mode  MainStream  Standby  Measurement   SideStream  Standby  Measurement   Default  Measurement  Compensate Method   MainStream  General O2 N20 DES ALL  SideStream  General O2 N20 DES ALL  Default Methods  General   Pump Rate  100     200 ml min   Default  100 ml min  Unit  mmHg kPa   Default  mmHg  Waveform Sweep  25 0 12 5 6 25  mm s   Default  25 0 mm s  Waveform Scale  LOW HIGH  Default  LOW  Besides  for alarm function of CO2 module  refer to Chapter Alarm  for its recording function   refer to Chapter Recording  and for information about alarm event review  graphic and tabular  trend of CO2 parameters  refer to Chapter Trend and Event     18 4 Alarm Information and Prompt    Among physiological alarms  those belonging to the type that the parameter has exceeded  the limits may activate the recorder to automatically output the parameters and related  measured waveforms when the alarms occur on the condition that the alarm record switch in  the related menu is On    Tables below describe the possible physiological alarms  technical alarms and prompt  messages occurring during CO2 measurement    Physiological alarms     Message Cause Alarm Level  CO2 TOO HIGH EtCo2 measuring value is above upper Debt  alarm limit   CO2 TOO LOW EtCO2 measuring value is below lower EE EE  alarm limit           Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  18 7    CO2 Monitoring       INS TOO HIGH    InsCO2 measuring value is abo
32.  93 42 EEC of 14 June 1993 concerning  medical devices  MDD 93 42 EEC      Standards    Harmonized Standards  published in the Official Journal of the European Communities   applicable to this product are    ISO14971  2000 A1 2003  EN1041 1998  EN980 2003  IEC60878 2003   ISO1000 1992 A1 1998  ISO10993 1 2003  1ISO3744 1994  EN540 1993   EN60601 1 1990 A1 1993 A2 1995 A13 1996  EN60601 1 1 2001  EN60601 1 2 2001   EN60601 1 4 2000  EN60601 2 27 1994  EN60601 2 30 2000  EN60601 2 34 2000   EN475 1995  EN865 1997  EN864 1996  EN12470 4 2000  EN1060 1 1995   EN1060 3 1997  IEC60601 2 49 2001  ANSI AAMI SP 10 1996     Notified Body  T  V Product Service GmbH  Ridlerstrasse 65 D  80339 Munich  Germany        2 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4        Appendix Il    Product Specification    1 Classification    Anti electroshock type  Anti electroshock degree    EMC  Harmful liquid proof degree    Disinfection sterilizing method  Working system    2 Specifications    2 1 Size and Weight    Size Monitor    Weight Monitor  2 2 Environment    Temperature    Working    Welch Allyn Sidestream CO   5  C  Welch Allyn Mainstream CO   Artema AION Anesthesia Gases  10  C    Storage  Humidiity  Working  Storage  Altitude  Working  Storage    Class   equipment with internal power supply  ECG RESP   SpO   NIBP  IBP  TEMP  CO  CO  CF  AG BF  Class A   Ordinary equipment  sealed equipment without liquid  proof    Refer to Operation manual for details     Continuous running equipment    318 x 
33.  A    Check alarm limits each time the monitor is used to ensure that they are  appropriate for the patient being monitored     SpO  and PR alarm limits           Max  Upper Limit Min  Lower Limit  GC  100 0 1  PR 240 25 1          Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  13 7    SpO2 Monitoring    m SWEEP  Available options are 12 5  25 0 mm s   m PRSOUND    Pulse beep volume  The options are from    3    to    0        3    indicates the maximum volume  while    0    the minimum   E AVG TIME  2 4S 4 6S  8S 10S 12S 14S  16S represent times that SpO  average value is counted   WH SENSITIVITY MODE  Available options are normal and high   m DEFAULT   Pick this item to access the SoO2 DEFAULT CONFIG dialog box  in which the user may  select whether the FACTORY DEFAULT CONFIG or the USER DEFAULT CONFIG is to  be used  After selecting any of the items and exiting the dialog box  the system will pop  up the dialog box asking for the user   s confirmation     PITCH TONE function    When SPO2 changes  if the    BEAT VOL    in    ECG SETUP    menu is set to a value other than     0     which means    BEAT VOL    is switched ON   the heart beat volume will change  automatically according to SPO2 value  This monitor has 20 kinds of PITCH TONE  the higher  the SPO2 value is  the higher the PITCH TONE will be     Although these 20 kinds of PITCH TONE could not be adjusted in menu  their volume could  be controlled  For example  when    SPO2    is selected as    HR SOURCE    in    ECG SETUP
34.  ALM HI  to adjust the upper alarm limit of InsCO2  If the measuring value is larger  than InsCO2 upper alarm limit     INS TOO HIGH    appears on the screen  After the  measuring value returns to the normal one  the information disappears        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  18 3    CO2 Monitoring    m AWRR ALM HI  to adjust the upper alarm limit of AWRR  If the measuring value is larger  than the upper alarm limit of AWRR     AWRR TOO HIGH    appears on the screen  After the  measuring value returns to the normal one  the information disappears    m AWRR ALM LO  to adjust the lower alarm limit of AWRR  If the measuring value is smaller  than the lower alarm limit of AwRR     AWRR TOO LOW    appears on the screen  After the  measuring value returns to the normal one  the information disappears    WR UNIT  to change the display units of CO2 and InsCO2 parameters     mmHg    and    kPa    are  available for selection    m APNEA ALM  After selecting the alarm time for APNEA alarm  having 7 levels  which are  10S  15S  20S  25S  30S  35S  and 40S   the    CO2 APNEA    information will appear on  the screen after the corresponding selected time  The alarm level is HIGH    m SWEEP  to adjust the display rate of CO2 waveforms with    6 25 mm s        12 5 mm s     or     25 0 mm s    selectable    gm Exit  to close CO2 SETUP menu     A Note A       APNEA ALM    cannot be closed     When various alarms occur simultaneously  the alarm information of highest level will be  d
35.  Alarm area  Technical alarms related to NIBP  measurement are displayed in the NIBP Technical Alarm area at the bottom of NIBP  parameter area     AN Note A    The Physiological Alarm area is on the upper right part of the screen  The Technical  Alarm area is to the left side of the Physiological Alarm area     A Note A    If PM 9000 is connected to the external alarm prompt system  e g  the alarm speaker  and indicator connected onto the rear panel of PM 9000   when alarm occurs  the  external alarm prompt system responds in the same way as the PM 9000     M Note A    The concrete presentation of each alarm prompt is related to the alarm level     Alarm prompt of the parameter exceeding the alarm limit    When physiological alarm of the monitored parameter exceeds the alarm limit  besides using  the above mentioned three ways to give the alarm prompt  the monitor also gives alarm by  making the monitored parameter flash in the frequency of 1Hz  If at this time the upper and  lower limits of the parameter are displayed  they will flash in the same frequency  1Hz      Screen Display    DEI    When an alarm occurs  the parameter triggering the alarm flashes          signal appears on the    Ok kk DEI    screen indicating the occurrence of alarm  Red    DEI    indicates high level alarm  yellow    indicates medium level alarm  and yellow         indicates low level alarm  Technical alarm will not          prompts         signal   Lamp light  The high medium low level alarms are
36.  Curve drawing will stop automatically when the measurement  completes  and then the C O   Cardiac output  and the C I   Cardiac Index     and in the  Figure 17 2  will be calculated and displayed on the screen  The monitor will also display the                         CO in the Parameter Area  as well as the remaining time to the next measurement  O in the  Figure 17 2         To ensure the accuracy of the measurement  it is suggested that a reasonable interval should  take place between two consecutive measurements  The length of the interval can be set in  the C O  SETUP menu  Time unit  second   The interval time counter    _ in the Figure 17 2   is displayed on the screen  The next measurement can not be performed until the time                reduces to zero and a prompt message    Ready for new measurement    appears     A Note AS    It is strongly recommended that the user must push the injector within four seconds  after pressing the START button     AN Note A    It is strongly recommended that you wait at least 1 minute  or longer depending on the  patient   s clinical condition  before starting the next measurement     Continue to repeat this procedure until you have completed the measurements you want to  perform     You can perform a maximum of 6 measurements before editing  If you perform additional       17 4 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     CO Measuring    measurements the oldest measurement each time will be deleted  If any of the curves in the  edi
37.  Device Configuration List    3 7 Drug Calculation    You can use the drug calculation and titration table function of PM 9000 to calculate the  concentration of 15 kinds of drugs  Refer to Chapter  Drug Calculation and Titration Table for  detailed information        3 12 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     System Menu    3 8 Maintenance    Select the  MAINTAIN  item in the    SYSTEM MENU    to call up the    ENTER MAINTAIN  PASSWORD    dialog box as shown below  in which you can enter password and then  customize maintenance settings  You cannot execute factory maintenance function  which is  only available for the service engineers of MINDRAY company     ENTER MAINTAIN PASSWORD    USER KEY  FACTORY KEY   CONF IRM CONF IRM  STATUS  gt  gt     ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTU  VUXYZ01234567869 DEL OK    EXIT    Figure 3 19 Enter Maintain Password  Input the password into the    ENTER MAINTAIN PASSWORD     box and press  CONFIRM   the     USER MAINTAIN    menu will pop up  in which you can set up following items     USER MAINTAIN    LANGUAGE ENGLISH  gt    AUX OUTPUT NURSE CALL       LEAD NAMING AHA S  ALM SOUND ON z  NET TYPE HYPER III    LOCAL NET NO 1 Ka    COLOR SELF DEFINE  gt  gt   NURSE CALL SETUP  gt  gt     Back to the upper menu     Figure 3 20 User Maintain  For the  LANGUAGE  language  you can set the screen language which display on the  screen      For the  AUX OUTPUT  item  there are two options available        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  3 13    Syste
38.  FiN20O ALM HI  used to adjust the upper alarm limit of PINO  When the measured  value is larger than FiN2O upper alarm limit  the    FiN2O HIGH    message is  displayed on the screen  In the UNLATCH mode  this message disappears when  the measured value is below the upper alarm limit     PINO ALM LO  used to adjust the lower alarm limit of FiN20  When the measured  value is smaller than PINO lower alarm limit  the  PINO LOW    message is  displayed on the screen  In the UNLATCH mode  this message disappears when  the measured value is above the lower alarm limit     EtAA ALM HI  used to adjust the upper alarm limit of EtAA  When the measured  value is larger than EtAA upper alarm limit  the    EtAA HIGH    message is  displayed on the screen  In the UNLATCH mode  this message disappears when  the measured value is below the upper alarm limit     EtAA ALM LO  used to adjust the lower alarm limit of EtAA  When the measured  value is smaller than EtAA lower alarm limit  the    EtAA LOW    message is  displayed on the screen  In the UNLATCH mode  this message disappears when  the measured value is above the lower alarm limit     FiIAA ALM HI  used to adjust the upper alarm limit of FiAA  When the measured  value is larger than FiAA upper alarm limit  the    FiAA HIGH    message is displayed  on the screen  In the UNLATCH mode  this message disappears when the       Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  19 7    Anesthetic Gas Measurement    measured value is below the upper ala
39.  Follow the manufacturer s  directions carefully to avoid damaging the monitor    3  Don t use the grinding material  such as steel wool etc    4  Don t let the cleaning agent enter into the chassis of the system    5  Don t leave the cleaning agents at any part of the equipment     11 3 Cleaning Agents    Examples of disinfectants that can be used on the instrument casing are listed below     RW Diluted Ammonia Water  RW Diluted Sodium Hyoichlo  Bleaching agent      A Note A    The diluted sodium hyoichlo from 500ppm 1 100 diluted bleaching agent  to 5000ppm   1 10 bleaching agents  is very effective  The concentration of the diluted sodium  hyocihlo depends on how many organisms  blood  mucus  on the surface of the  chassis to be cleaned     Diluted Formaldehyde 35     37   Hydrogen Peroxide 3    Alcohol   isopropanol    A Note A    PM 9000 monitor and sensor surface can be cleaned with hospital grade ethanol and  dried in air or with crisp and clean cloth        11 2 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     Care   Cleaning    A Note A    Mindray has no responsibility for the effectiveness of controlling infectious disease  using these chemical agents  Please contact infectious disease experts in your  hospital for details     11 4 Sterilization    To avoid extended damage to the equipment  sterilization is only recommended when  stipulated as necessary in the Hospital Maintenance Schedule  Sterilization facilities should  be cleaned first    Recommended sterilization mat
40.  IBP cable of channel    IBP2SENSOROFF 2 falls off from Low Make sure that cable is properly  monitor connected   IBP 1 2  INIT ERR  IBP 1 2  INIT ERR1  IBP 1 2  INIT ERR2  IBP 1 2  INIT ERR3 i   i  Stop using measuring function of  IBP 1 2  INIT ERR4 IBP module failure HIGH IBP module  notify biomedical  IBP 1 2  INIT ERR5 engineer or Our service staff   IBP 1 2  INIT ERR6  IBP 1 2  INIT ERR7  IBP 1 2  INIT ERR8  ER CONN rag dee Stop using ALARM function of IBP  STOP EE HIGH module  notify biomedical engineer  Failure or Our service staff   IBP 1 2  Stop using ALARM function of IBP  IBP 1 2  COMM ERR communication Biror HIGH module  notify biomedical engineer  or Our service staff   Functional safet Stop using ALARM function of IBP  IBP1 ALM LMT ERR failure Y HIGH module  notify biomedical engineer  or Our service staff   Functional safet Stop using ALARM function of IBP  IBP2 ALM LMT ERR HTC Y HIGH module  notify biomedical engineer    or Our service staff           16 10    Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     IBP Monitoring    Prompt message           Alarm  Message Cause EN  IBP1 SYS EXCEED Systolic value of channel 1 is beyond HIGH  measurement range   IBP1 DIA EXCEED Diastolic measuring value of channel 1 is HIGH  beyond measurement range   IBP1 MEAN EXCEED Mean measuring value of channel 1 is HIGH    beyond measurement range        Systolic value of channel 2 is beyond HIGH    IBP2 SYS EXCEED  measurement range                 IBP2 DIA EXCEED Diastolic measuring
41.  IS EXCLUSIVE AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES   EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED  INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANT ABILITY OR  FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE     Exemptions    Mindray s obligation or liability under this warranty does not include any transportation or  other charges or liability for direct  indirect or consequential damages or delay resulting from  the improper use or application of the product or the substitution upon it of parts or  accessories not approved by Mindray or repaired by anyone other than a Mindray authorized  representative     This warranty shall not extend to any instrument which has been subjected to misuse   negligence or accident  any instrument from which Mindray s original serial number tag or  product identification markings have been altered or removed  or any product of any other  manufacturer     Safety  Reliability and Performance    Mindray is not responsible for the effects on safety  reliability and performance of the   PM 9000 Portable Patient Monitor if    M assembly operations  extensions  re adjusts  modifications or repairs are carried out by  persons other than those authorized by Mindray    mM the PM 9000 Portable Patient Monitor is not used in accordance with the instructions for  use  or the electrical installation of the relevant room does not comply with NFPA 70   National Electric Code or NFPA 99  Standard for Health Care Facilities  Outside the  United States  the relevant room must comply with all electrical installa
42.  LIGHT tissue covering sensor d  detector  Reposition sensor   SpO2 LOW l Ensure proper sensor  Low signal quality  application  Mover sensor to a  SIGNAL IQ l  better perfused site   i Stop using the measuring  This message appears when   function of SpO2 module   SpO2          BOARD FAULT the Masimo Set board   notify biomedical engineer or  malfunctions  our service staff   This message is displayed  when the front end module is   Stop using the measuring    SpO2 COMMUNICATION  ERROR    having problems  communicating   ie  framing  errors or bad checksums  with  the Masimo board     function of SpO2 module   notify biomedical engineer or  our service staff        SpO2 COMMUNICATION  STOP    This message is displayed  when the host can not receive  the data from Masimo board  for 5 seconds    Stop using the measuring  function of SpO2 module   notify biomedical engineer or  our service staff        SpO2 INIT ERR    This message is displayed  when the SpO2 module  initialization error happened     Stop using the measuring  function of SpO2 module   notify biomedical engineer or  our service staff                 p x TEMP1 sensor is not   Check the connection of  ER connected correctly  TEMP1 sensor   TEMP2 sensor is not   Check the connection of     TEMP2 SENSOR OFF     connected correctly     TEMP2 sensor         IBP1 LEAD OFF     IBP1 sensor is not connected    Check the connection of IBP1       correctly  sensor    IBP2 LEAD OFF  IBP2 sensor is not connected   Check the c
43.  Nevertheless the Parameter area refreshes normally     a In the Freeze status  it does not affect the display and refresh of the Trend Graph  area on the trend screen  the display and refresh of oxyCRG on the Dynamic Refresh  screen  or the display and refresh of the Viewbed window on the Viewbed screen       The frozen waveforms can be reviewed or recorded     6 2 Enter Exit Freeze Status    Enter Freeze Status    In the Non Freeze status  press the    FREEZE    button on the front panel of the monitor to let  the system exit the Menu being currently displayed  if available   then enter the Freeze status  and display the popup    FROZEN    menu  In the Freeze status  except Viewbed waveforms  all  other waveforms are frozen  In other words  the system will no longer refresh all other  waveforms     Exit Freeze Status    In the Freeze status  executing any of the following operations will command the system to  exit the Freeze status     H Select the    EXIT    option on the    FROZEN    menu     m Press the    FREEZE    button on the front panel again        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  6 1    Freeze    m Press the non immediate to execute button  such as a button once pressed  a  menu will pop up for you to further select an option  on the front panel and system  buttons of MAIN and MENU     m Execute any operation that may trigger the adjustment of the screen or display of  anew menu     After exiting the Freeze status  the system will discharge the Freeze stat
44.  Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  14 1    NIBP Monitoring    A Warning A    Make sure that the air conduit connecting the blood pressure cuff and the monitor is  neither blocked nor tangled     1  Plug in the air hose and switch on the system    2  Apply the blood pressure cuff to the patient s arm or leg following the instructions below   Figure 14 1     WH Ensure that the cuff is completely deflated       Apply the appropriate size cuff to the patient  and make sure that the symbol      is over  the appropriate artery  Ensure that the cuff is not wrapped too tightly around the limb   Excessive tightness may cause discoloration and eventual ischemia of the extremities     Si    m de   Q    A    J gt               Ki     Sd est   Figure 14 1 Applying Cuff    A Note A    The width of the cuff should be either 40  of the limb circumference  50  for neonates   or 2 3 of the upper arm length  The inflatable part of the cuff should be long enough to  encircle 50 80  of the limb  The wrong size of cuff can cause erroneous readings  H  the cuff size is in question  then use a larger cuff     Size of reusable cuff for neonate children adult                            Patient Type Limb perimeter Cuff width Hose  Infant 10  19 cm 8 cm  Child 18   26 cm 10 6 cm  1 5 mor  Adult 25   35 cm 14 cm  3m  Large Adult 33   47 cm 17 cm  Thigh 46   66 cm 21 cm  Size of disposable cuff for neonate children adult  Size No  Limb perimeter Cuff width Hose  1 3 1   5 7 cm 2 5 cm  2 4 3   8 0 cm
45.  TEMP LO Step  T1  T2 50 0 0 1  TD 50 0 0 1  E UNIT To set temperature unit    C or   F      m DEFAULT Pick this item to access the TEMP DEFAULT CONFIG dialog box  in which  the user may select whether the FACTORY DEFAULT CONFIG or the  USER DEFAULT CONFIG is to be used  After selecting any of the items  and exiting the dialog box  the system will pop up the dialog box asking for  the user   s confirmation        15 2 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     NIBP Monitoring    15 3 TEMP Alarm message    Among physiological alarms  those belonging to the type that the parameter has exceeded  the limits may activate the recorder to automatically output the parameters and related  measured waveforms when the alarms occur on the condition that the alarm record switch in  the related menu is On    Tables below describe the possible physiological alarms  technical alarms and prompt  messages occurring during TEMP measurement     Physiological alarms     Message Cause Alarm Level  e Measuring value of channel 1 is above upper alarm limit    User selectable       TI TOO LOW Measuring value of channel 1 is below lower alarm limit  User selectable       ica Measuring value of channel 2 is above upper alarm limit    User selectable       T2 TOO LOW Measuring value of channel 2 is below lower alarm limit  User selectable          TD TOO Difference between two channels is larger than upper User s  lectable  HIGH limit   Technical alarms   Alarm  Alarm Message Cause aval Remedy    Temper
46.  TOO LOW is below lower alarm limit  User selectable   ND TOO HIGH e measuring value   User selectable  above upper alarm limit    ND TOO LOW NIBP DIA measuring value S User selectable  below lower alarm limit    NM TOO HIGN NIBP MAP measuring value User selectable  is above upper alarm limit    NM TOO LOW MBE May measuring  value User selectable    is below lower alarm limit           Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     Technical alarms 1      display in information area     NIBP Monitoring          Alarm  Message Cause Level Remedy  Stop using alarming functions of  PS ALMLMT Functional safety failure HIGH NIBP module and notify biomedical  engineer or Mindray service staff   Stop using alarming functions of  NMALMLMT Functional safety failure HIGH NIBP module and notify biomedical  engineer or Mindray service staff   Stop using alarming functions of  NO aE   Functional safety failure HIGH NIBP module and notify biomedical    engineer or Mindray service staff        Technical alarms 2   display in the area below the NIBP value                                         Alarm  Message Cause Level Remedy  Sensor or other Stop using measuring function of  NIBP SELE TEST hardware of NIBP HIGH NIBP module  notify biomedical  module is incorrect  engineer or Mindray service staff   If failure persists  stop using  Communication with measuring function of NIBP module   MBP COMM ERR NIBP module is failed  HGN notify biomedical engineer or  Mindray service staff   Cuff is no pro
47.  The user could select the function of this port in    NURSE CALL SETUP    menu of    USER  MAINTAIN    menu  Refer to the section about    USER MAINTAIN    menu to know the  detailed information   ANALOG OUTPUT  connected to oscillograph and pen recorder  BNC Jack   NURSE CALL  connected to the CALL system of the hospital by using dedicated  NURSE CALL cable                             AN Note A    The output terminal of NURSE CALL cable has two leads in free status  e  no distinction  between positive or negative   Before use  the service engineer from MINDRAY or equipment  engineer of the hospital must first install the accompanying connectors according to the real  situation of the CALL system of the hospital        m FUSE   Socket     T1 6A  mM Network Interfaces  Socket         Standard RJ45 Socket   When using wireless network module  connect this part to the wireless network module                             RW Wireless network module                   The wireless network module is used to connect the monitor to the Central Monitoring  System   The Indicator lights and the meanings are        1 12 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     Introduction             Power  green     Indicates power when active        GI Status  amber     Indicates the software has detected an  abnormal condition  See event log for  status information        Associated  green       Radio Activity  amber     A green LED indicates association between the  CB 1000 and an AP or a MicroAP o
48.  and  the alarm indicator flashes  If the REC is ON  the alarm record will be printed out  4 seconds  prior to and after the alarm  with the ECG waveforms of analysis channel      Physiological alarms                             Applicable  Prompt Patient Occurring Condition Alarm Level  Type  ASYSTOL   No QRS is detected for 4 consecutive  E All patients seconds User selectable  Fibrillatory wave for consecutive 4  seconds  or  VFIB Without The number of continuous Vent beats is  NTAC pacemaker larger than the upper limit of cluster User selectable  Vent beats   gt 5    The RR interval is less than 600ms   VT gt 2 Without 3  lt  the number of cluster PVCs  lt 5 User selectable  pacemaker    COUPLET Without 2 consecutive PVCs User selectable  pacemaker  BIGEMINY Without Vent Bigeminy User selectable  pacemaker  TE enor Vent Trigeminy User selectable  Y pacemaker          Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     12 19       ECG RESP Monitoring                                                 A type of single PVC under the  condition that HR lt 100  R R interval is  Without less than 1 3 the average interval   RONT acemaker followed by a compensating pause of User selectable  H 1 25X the average R R interval the next  R wave advances onto the previous T  wave    Without Single PVCs not belonging to the type    ENG pacemaker of above mentioned PVCs  User selectable  5 consecutive QRS complex   RR    TACHY All patients interval is less than 500ms  User selectable    5 consecutiv
49.  and the monitor automatically calculates the RESP RATE    e HOLD HI and HOLD LO  When it is AUTO mode  HOLD HI and HOLD LO menus cannot  be used and the monitor automatically calculates the RESP RATE  When the HOLD TYPE  is MANUAL  the user can use the knob to pick either HOLD HI or HOLD LO and turn the  knob to adjust the two dashed lines in the RESP WAVEFORM area respectively  The  positions of the dashed lines will be used to calculate the upper and lower limits of RESP  RATE by the monitor     e DEFAULT  pick this item to access the RESP DEFAULT CONFIG dialog box  in which the  user may select whether the FACTORY DEFAULT CONFIG or the USER DEFAULT  CONFIG is to be used  After selecting any of the items and exiting the dialog box  the  system will pop up the dialog box asking for the user   s confirmation    RESP Alarm Message    Among physiological alarms  those belonging to the type that the parameter has exceeded  the limits may activate the recorder to automatically output the parameters and related  measured waveforms when the alarms occur on the condition that the alarm record switch in  the related menu is On     Tables below describe the possible physiological alarms  technical alarms and prompt  messages occurring during resp measurement     Physiological alarms           Message Cause Alarm Level  RR TOO HIGH RESP measuring value is above upper alarm limit  User selectable  RRTOO LOW RESP measuring value is below lower alarm limit  User selectable  RESP APNEA E 
50.  anesthetics   Explanation of Symbols in the Monitor    e   This symbol means BE CAREFUL   Refer to the manual                   This symbol indicates that the instrument is IEC 60601 1 Type CF equipment  The          10 2 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     Patient Safety    unit displaying this symbol contains an F Type isolated  floating  patient applied part providing  a high degree of protection against shock  and is suitable for use during defibrillation     Equipotential grounding system   Protective earth ground     QO    Partial On Off    LE    This item is compliant with Medical Device Directive 93 42 EEC of 14 June 1993  a directive  of the European Economic Community        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  10 3       Chapter 11 Care   Cleaning    11 1 System Check    Before using the monitor  do the following     WH check if there is any mechanical damage   WH check all the outer cables  inserted modules and accessories   WH check al the functions of the monitor to make sure that the monitor is in good condition     If you find any damage on the monitor  stop using the monitor on patient  and contact the  biomedical engineer of the hospital or Mindray Customer Service immediately     The overall check of the monitor  including the safety check  should be performed only by  qualified personnel once every 6 to 12 month  and each time after fix up     You should check the synchronism of the defibrillator in the frequency described in the  hospital regul
51.  as the  length of the waveform displayed on the screen  For example  if the speed of a waveform is  relatively fast  then it needs shorter time to record it  When recording frozen waveforms  the  system is still in the Freeze status  After completion of recording  if required  you may select  once more the waveform to be output and select    REC    option again to record the whole  selected waveforms  You may also record frozen waveforms by pressing the    REC STOP     button on the front panel  If the recorder does not exist  selecting the    REC    option can only  call out the prompt    Recorder does not exist    in the STATUS bar  For more detailed  information about recording  please refer to the chapter of    Recording           Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  6 3       Chapter 7 Recording    WR General information on recording  H Instructions for configuring and recording  m Recording messages    7 1 General Information on Recording    A thermal dot matrices recorder with 48mm wide printout paper is used for PM 9000 Portable  Patient Monitor     Performance of the Recorder    Waveform record is printed out at a rate of 25 or 50 mm s    It can record up to 2 waveforms    Output with grid selectable    English   Chinese printout    The real time recording time and waveform are user configurable     Auto recording interval is set by the user  the waveform is in accordance with the real  time recording   H The alarm recording waveform is automatically selected by 
52.  avoid the interference  from the parameters that need not attention     3 4 7 Tracing Waveforms Selection    Select the  TRACE SETUP  in the    SYSTEM SETUP    menu to call up the following menu     TRACE SETUP    v ECGi v RESP  v ECG2   v SP02   v IBP1   v IBP2   v US   WAVE SEQUENCE  gt  gt     Back to the upper menu     Figure 3 13 Tracing Waveforms Selection  You can define the traces displayed on the screen in this menu  The waveforms available for  selection are those whose modules have been selected in    MODULE SETUP    menu   This user can only decide the display sequence of the waveforms on the screen  Select the     WAVE SEQUENCE    item in the menu to access the sub menu of the same name as shown  in the figure below        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  3 9    System Menu    WAVE SEQUENCE    1  first channel  Z   channel  and so on     EXIT       Figure 3 14 Wave sequence    3 4 8 Event Setup    The monitor has four types of events  You can specify their representations by yourself   Select the  MARK EVENT  item in the    SYSTEM SETUP    to call up the following menu     MARK EVENT    EVENT B  EVENT C  EVENT D    A B C D are the symbols for  operator    def ined events     EXIT    Figure 3 15 MARK EVENT Menu    How to mark the event  Use the rotary knob to select one from event A  B  C and D  The      symbol will appear in the frame of the event being selected  Once making a wrong selection     you can push the knob on the event again to give up the sel
53.  bed number  name  sex  height  weight  date of birth  admission date   Parameter name and value   Recording time   Waveform name   Waveform scale  for ECG waveform    ECG lead  scale  filter mode   if having ECG waveforms  it will be printed out within the  first second or when changing the lead  gain and filter mode during real time recording     IBP scale  the first second of IBP waveform    CO2 scale  the first second of CO2 waveform    Date and time   Company name    7 3 Recording Startup    You can start the recording in the following ways     Continuous real time recording Press REC STOP to start stop the recording     8 second real time recording Press REC STOP to start recording  It will automatically    stop in 8 seconds     Auto recording Record the two waveforms selected in RECORD menu    according to the setup time interval in RECORD menu     Alarm recording When alarm recording is set ON  it automatically starts    when alarm occurs     Frozen waveform recording    After accessing FREEZE menu  use knob to select two    waveforms to be output  Then press REC button in the  menu to print out the waveforms     FRULZER    WAVE 1   ECG1 x  WAVE 2 ECG2 be    RECALL REC EXIT    If two waveforms are off  the measure parameters in frozen  are printed out only     Trend graph recording Pick    REC    button in the    TREND GRAPH    menu when  viewing the trend graph to print out the currently displayed  trend graph    Trend table recording Pick    REC    button in the    
54.  channel 2    m The pressure calibration of the monitor       Pressure      Transducer  T type  Stopcock  Pressure  T type     Transducer  connector Interface cable    he    Hydrargyrum    Pressure meter MOHITOR    Figure 16 7 IBP Calibration    Caution    H Mercury calibration should be performed by the biomedical engineering department  either whenever a new transducer is used or as periodically as requested by your  Hospital regulation    H The purpose of the calibration is to ensure that the system gives you accurate  measurements    H Before starting a mercury calibration  a zero procedure must be performed    m  f you need to perform this procedure yourself you will need the following pieces of  equipment    e Standard sphygmomanometer  e   3 way stopcock  e Tubing approximately 25 cm long    The Calibration Procedure   SEE Figure 16 7     A Warning A    You must never perform this procedure while patient is being monitored        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  16 7    IBP Monitoring    Disconnect transducer with patient  when patient is monitored    By using of tube  one end of T type connector links to 3 way stopcock of transducer   another end links to inflation orb and the third end links to sohygmomanometer    Vent the stopcock of transducer to atmosphere and run zeroing procedure  Open the  stopcock to the sohygmomanometer side after successful zeroing    Select the calibrated channel in    IBP calibration    menu and preset the calibration  pressure of t
55.  connector to the appropriate  parts of the cardiac output interface cable   see the following figure     3   Pick the CO hot key in the parameter area on the screen to call up the C O SELECT menu  and if necessary change the computation constant to the one appropriate to the catheter  and volume of fluid used                          A Note A    If to replace the Catheter thermistor  please enter the catheter computation coefficient  into the CO CONST item according to the instruction        AT Pick C O  MEASURE item in the C O SELECT menu to access the WINDOW FOR CO  MEASUREMENT              A Note A    You should appropriately set the injectate switch  because the CO calculation will be  according to the ON or OFF of the injectate switch at the completion of measurement   No change shall be made after the switch is set off        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  17 1    CO Measuring    MONITOR CM      Y A injectate    i    FN d  RS ke    een   s  t  f    Le Cardiac Output  l E Cable    f in ectale Sensor    ZZ    siectale Sensor y Delivery    en  WAN  Tree Hausin Eh  j T d sing Ay    W System  Thermoditution   Y    v L     Catheter i Ki  A    Gi  iAy A K WW  Wi N W  N       q   e   Za  T      vA  p a P i n line injectate  e  E  T Temperature probe    Figure 17 1 CO sensor connection       o    D You can perform more than one measurement as required    D After completion of the measurement s   access the WINDOW FOR CO EDIT to edit  measured data    The procedure in d
56.  disposed of in compliance with the guidelines regulation the  disposal of such products  If you have questions concerning disposal of the product   please contact MINDRAY or its representatives     A Caution A    If you have any doubt to the grounding layout and its performance  you must use the  built in battery to power the monitor     1 1 General Information    Environment     Temperature  Working 0   40    C   Transport and Storage  20 60    C   Humidity  Working 15   85    Transport and Storage 10   93   Altitude  Working  500 to 4 600m  1 600 to 15 000ft   Transport and Storage  500 to 13 100m  1 600 to 43 000ft   Power Supply  100 250  V AC  50 60  Hz   Pmax   110VA  FUSE T1 6A       General instruction             PM 9000 is a Portable Patient Monitor that has abundant monitoring functions and is used for  the clinical monitoring of adult  pediatric and neonate  In addition  the user may select the  different parameter configuration according to different requirements    PM 9000 can be connected to the central monitoring system via the Mindray network so as to  form a network monitoring system    PM 9000  Figure 1 1  can monitor vital signals as ECG  Respiratory Rate  SpO2  NIBP        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  1 3    Introduction    Dual TEMP  Dual IBP  CO  CO2 and anesthetic gases  It integrates parameter measuring  modules  display and recorder in one device  featuring in compactness  lightweight and  portability  Replaceable built in battery facilit
57.  from  abnormal performance   CONTINUAL  Start continuous measuring   When this item is picked  the menu will disappear automatically   INTERVAL  Interval time for automatic measuring  Available selections   1 2 3 4 5 1 0 15 30 60 90 120 180 240 480 minutes  Press START STOP button on the  NIBP module to start the first auto measuring   Pick MANUAL selection in INTERVAL item to set up the measuring mode to MANUAL   UNIT  Pick this item to set measurement unit   Option  mmHg or kPa   CALIBRATE  Calibrate the cuff pressure reading with a calibrated reference manometer  Pick the  CALIBRATE item to start the calibration and the item will change into STOP CAL  which if  picked  the system will stop calibration   DEFAULT  Pick this item to access the NIBP DEFAULT CONFIG dialog box  in which the user may  select whether the FACTORY DEFAULT CONFIG or the USER DEFAULT CONFIG is to  be used  After selecting any of the items and exiting the dialog box  the system will pop up       Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     NIBP Monitoring    the dialog box asking for the user   s confirmation     A warning A    The calibration of the NIBP measurement is necessary for every two years  or as  frequently as dictated by your Hospital Procedures Policy   The performance should be  checked according to the following details     Procedure of the Pressure Transducer Calibration    Replace the cuff of the device with a rigid metal vessel with a capacity of 500 ml   5    Connect a calibrated refe
58.  from 25  C ambient   5W supplied to sensor heater    Mainstream sensor temperature controlled to 42  C   100 msec  10  to 90      240 msec  10  to 90       1 12 seconds maximum with 7 feet length  0 055 inch ID     Sampling line at 175 ml min       Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  7    Production Specification    CO2  Ins CO2  AwRR  Suffocation Alarm Delay  AwRR    2 16 AG    Method  Measuring mode  Warm up time    0 99 mmHg  0 99 mmHg  0     150 rpm   10   40 Sec     Infrared Absorption Technique    Side stream    30 Sec  10 Min    Side stream mode sampling gas flow rate    Adult   Neonate   Gas Sort  Measuring range  CO2  N20  Des  Sev  Enf  Iso  Hal  O2  awRR  Resolution  CO   awRR  Accuracy    CO     N O    Des    Sev       1000 150                      Iso accuracy mode  Full accuracy mode    200 ml min  option     700 oO  120 ml min  option   COz2  N20  O2  Option   Des    Iso   Enf   Sev   Hal                    0  10    0 76 mmHg     0 100   0  18   0  8   0  5     0  100  Option     2 100 rpm    1 mmHg  1 rpm    Accuracy   0 1    0 2     0 3    0 4  Unspecified   2     3    0 15    0 2    0 4    0 6   Unspecified   0 15    0 2     range  0 1   1 5   5 7    7     10    gt  10   0  20   20   100   0 1    1  5   5 10   10   18    gt 18   0 1    1  5        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     Production Specification     0 4  5 8   Unspecified  gt  8   Enf  Iso  Hal  0 15  0 1    0 2  1 5   Unspecified  gt 5   O2  Option   1  0  25    2  25 80    3  80 100
59.  in  the  ALM PAUSE TIME  item in the    SYSTEM MENU MAINTAIN       After pushing the SILENCE button again  the system will restore the normal status  Besides   the occurrence of any new technical alarm will also terminate the PAUSE status and let the  system restore the normal status  The 4 symbol disappears  too     AY Note A    After the system goes back to the normal status  the existence of alarm depends on  whether the alarm condition is complied with  After pushing the SILENCE button  the  system will permanently shut off the alarm sound for LEAD OFF SENSOR OFF alarm        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  5 5    Alarm    5 5 Parameter Alarm    The setup for parameter alarms is in their menus  In the menu for a specific parameter  you   can check and set the alarm limit  alarm status  The setup is isolated from each other    When a parameter alarm is off  a symbol       amp      displays near the parameter  If the alarms   are turned off individually  they must be turned on individually    For the parameters whose alarm is set to ON  the alarm will be triggered when at least one of   them exceeds alarm limit  The following actions take place    1  Alarm message displays on the screen as described in alarm mode    2  The monitor beeps in its corresponding alarm class and volume    3  Alarm lamp flashes    4  Store all parameter values during the alarm and 4 8 or 16 second waveform prior to and  after alarm    5  If alarm recording is on  the recorder starts alarm
60.  in Auto mode may be  associated with purport  ischemia and neuropathy in the limb wearing the cuff  When  monitoring a patient  examine the extremities of the limb frequently for normal color   warmth and sensitivity  If any abnormality is observed  stop the blood pressure  measurements     To stop auto measuring    During auto measuring press START button on the front panel at any time to stop auto   measurement    To start a manual measuring    H Access NIBP SETUP menu and pick the INTERVAL item  Select the MANUAL  selection  Then press the START button on the front panel to start a manual  measurement    m During the idle period of auto measuring process  press the START button on the  front panel at any time to start a manual measurement  Then press the START  button on the front panel to stop manual measurement and the system continues  executes auto measuring program according to selected time interval    To start a manual measuring during the AUTO mode    Press START button on the front panel    To stop a manual measuring       Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  14 3    NIBP Monitoring    Repress the START button on the front panel again    6  To perform continuous measuring   Access NIBP SETUP menu and pick the CONTINUAL item to start the continuous  measurement  The monitor will measure as many times of NIBP as possible within 5  minutes     A Warning A    Prolonged non invasive blood pressure measurements in continual mode may be  associated with purport  isch
61.  indicated by the system in following different visual  ways   Alarm level Visual prompt   High Alarm indicator flashes in red with high frequency    Medium Alarm indicator flashes in yellow with low frequency    Low Alarm indicator lights on in yellow     Alarm Sound    The high medium low level alarms are indicated by the system in following different audio       5 2 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     Alarm             ways   Alarm level Audio prompt  High Mode is    DO DO DO       DO DO  DO DO DO       DO DO     which is  g triggered once every 8 seconds   Medium Mode is    DO DO DO     which is triggered once every 24 seconds   Low Mode is    DO      which is triggered once every 24 seconds   A Note A    When alarms of different levels occur at the same time  the monitor prompts the one of  the highest level     Alarm Setup    The setup of the alarms can be realized in the alarm menu    Press the    ALARM SETUP    button on the SYSTEM SETUP menu to call up    ALARM SETUP     menu  default menu  as shown below  In the    ALM SEL    item  the user may set up the  information about common alarm setup  represented by    COMMON ALM SETUP     and the  alarm setup of each parameter     ALARM SETUP    ALM SEL COMMON ALM SETUP X7  ALARM VOL 2 z  ALM REC TIME 8S      ALM PAUSE TIME 2MIN    4    PARA ALM TYPE UNLATCH    Back to the upper menu     Figure 5 1 ALARM SETUP    4      COMMON ALM SETUP   Select    COMMON ALM SETUP    selection in    ALM SEL    item  This operation 
62.  instead of their real names  The units for these                                     five drugs are fixed  The operator may select the appropriate units according to the  convention of using these drugs  The rules for expressing the units are       mg    series units are fixedly used for drug A  B and C  g  mg  mcg       unit    series units are fixedly used for drug D  unit  k unit  m unit       mEq    is fixedly used for drug E       9 2 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     Drug Calculation and Titration Table    Patient weight    After accessing the DRUG CALC window  the operator should enter the patient weight into  the first or the second item  The entered weight will be used as the independent data only for  the calculation of drug concentration     A Note A    This drug calculation function acts only as a calculator  That means the patient weight  in Drug Calculation menu and the patient weight in Patient Information menu are  independent from each other  Therefore if the Weight in Drug Calculation changes  the  Weight in Patient Information does not change  In this way  we can say  the Drug  Calculation menu is independent from other menus in the system  Any change of it will  not affect other information about the patient being currently monitored     9 2 Titration Table    Access titration table   Select TITRATION item in DRUG CALC menu to enter titration table display   Titration table display for drug is as following     TITRATION     Drug A    AMOUNT 400 0
63.  interval time set in the    TIMING  REC TIME    of the    RECORDER     menu  Refer to Chapter 3 5 Recorder Setup for details     Alarm Recording    Parameter Alarm    The monitor records waveforms 4  8  or 16 seconds prior to and after the alarm  totally 8  16  or 32 seconds   which can be selected in System Menu   All parameter values during the             alarm will also be recorded        When parameter alarm occurs  two recorded waveforms can be printed out    In order to avoid repeated printout of alarm waveforms    m  f more than two parameter alarms are switched on and triggered simultaneously  the  recorder will print out those of the highest level  If of the same alarm level  the latest  alarm will be printed out    H  f an alarm occurs during the alarm of another parameter  it will be printed out after the  current recording is finished    m H many alarms occur at the same time  some of waveforms will be stored for printout in    turn     ST Segment Alarm    The monitor records 2 channel ECG waveforms 4  8  or 16 seconds prior to and after the  alarm  totally 8  16  or 32 seconds   which can be selected in the ECG SETUP menu   All  parameter values during the alarm will also be recorded        7 2 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     Recording    Arrhythmia Alarm    The monitor records 2 channel ECG waveforms 4 seconds prior to and after the alarm  totally  8 seconds   All measurement results during the alarm will also be recorded     Freeze Waveform Recordi
64.  measured value is below the upper alarm limit     AwRR ALM LO  used to adjust the lower alarm limit of AwRR  When the  measured value is smaller than AwRR lower alarm limit  the    AwRR LOW     message is displayed on the screen  In the UNLATCH mode  this message  disappears when the measured value is above the lower alarm limit     OTHER SETUP gt  gt   used to enter the other ALARM SETUP menus     EXIT  used to close this    ALARM SETUP    menu     After selecting    OTHER SETUP gt  gt     item in the ALARM SETUP menu  the following ALARM  SETUP menu pops up        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     Anesthetic Gas Measurement    ALARM SETUP    EtN20 ALM HI 55   EtAA ALM LO 0 0    EtN20 ALN LO o   FiAA ALM HI 6 0    FiN20 ALM HI 53   FiAA ALM LO 0 0      FiN20 ALM LO o   APNEA ALM 205 S  EtAA ALM HI 8 0       gt     Back to the upper menu         a ae    Figure 19 5 ALARM SETUP menu for other parameters    EtN O ALM HI  used to adjust the upper alarm limit of EtN2O  When the measured  value is larger than EtNsO upper alarm limit  the    EtN2O HIGH    message is  displayed on the screen  In the UNLATCH mode  this message disappears when  the measured value is below the upper alarm limit     N O ALM LO  used to adjust the lower alarm limit of EtN20  When the  measured value is smaller than EtN2O lower alarm limit  the  N O LOW     message is displayed on the screen  In the UNLATCH mode  this message  disappears when the measured value is above the lower alarm limit    
65.  nere arr eraan aaa e a Enana ne sade anasan ina 7 1  7 1 General Information on Recording           sessssseessseesresiesrirssirssrissrnnsrnnsrnnsrnnsrnnsennnsren 7 1  Te RECOGNI TYDE EE 7 1  73  Recording EE De DEE 7 4  7 4 Recorder Operations and Status Messages            sessseesesseesietrieesetrirrrresrresre 7 5  Chapter 8 Trend and Event            cccsceeseseeesneeeeseeeeeseeesnaeeeseeeeeeaeeesaesaseeeenseeeseeeseneanenseeeeesees 8 1  821  Trend Graphs ci 0t4 4  Set E E 8 1  8 2 Trend E LEE 8 3  EK HE EE 8 4  8 4 Alarm  Event Recalls orire na a a AEA Naa E A E pains dee 8 5  Chapter 9 Drug Calculation and Titration Table               ecccscessseesseeeeeeceesseeseseeeeneeeeeeeees 9 1  9 1  Drug Calculati Nesini iiia iia a vee Bee dl eae A 9 1  O22 IMATION abe a a ee geesde aa biayas tends 9 3  Chapter 10  Patient Safety  anae ae aieeaa aaaea aaa ata aeaaea aeea neeaaeia aci naii 10 1  Chapter 11 Care   Cleaning         sssnsssnsuuneunnsunnnunnnuunnunnnunnnnnnnnunnnunnnunnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 11 1  21 System  Gheck  TT 11 1  11 2 General Cleanimg   nenn nenn nnet 11 2  1123 Cleaning Age EE 11 2  PA  EE e ET 11 3  dis Disintection giver ieee ae avi Ala hana Ada ih Anaad 11 3  Chapter 12 ECG RESP Monitoring             c scccseeeeeseeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeseaeseseeeneeeeseneeeseaeeneeeeeeees 12 1  12 1 What Is ECG Montoring  12 1  12 2 Precautions during ECG Monitoring  12 1  12 3 Monitoring Procedure sosis asiata akaa aE NA AE iaa eia 12 2  12 4 ECG Screen Hot Keys
66.  of CO  CO COMM ERR communication HIGH module  notify biomedical engineer or  failure Mindray service staff   TB ALM LMT Functional safet Stop using TB alarming function  notify  ERR failure Y HIGH   biomedical engineer or Mindray service    staff        Prompt message  general alerts      Message Cause Alarm Level    TB EXCEED TB measuring value is HIGH  beyond measuring range        17 6 Maintenance and Cleaning    Care and Maintenance    A Warning A    Before cleaning the monitor or the transducer  make sure that the equipment is  switched off and disconnected from the power line     CO Cable Cleaning    1  If adhesive tape residue must be removed from the transducer cable  double seal tape  remover is effective and will cause a minimum of damage to the cable if used sparingly   Acetone  Alcohol  Ammonia  Chloroform  or other strong solvents are not recommended  because they will eventually damage the vinyl cabling    2  Sponge the cable with warm water and soap  or another suitable cleaning solution  and  dry  Do not immerse them in water    3  Check each cable for corrosion  cracks and deterioration    4  Gas Sterilization  For more complete asepsis  use gas sterilization    O Remove obvious contamination by using the cleaning procedure described  previously  To inhibit the formation of ethylene glycol when ethylene oxide gas is  used as the disinfectant  the transducer should be completely dry    o Follow the operating instructions provided by the manufacturer of the ga
67.  or  Mindray service staff           Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     13 21       SpO2 Monitoring    Prompt message  include general alerts                     Message Cause Alarm Level  SPO2 EXCEED Sp  measuring value exceeds the range  HIGH  PR EXCEED PR measuring value exceeds the range  HIGH  SEARCH PULSE SpO  module is searching for pulse  No alarm  NO PULSE d module cannot detect Sp  signal for a long HIGH             13 2 7 Maintenance and Cleaning    Care and Cleaning    A Warning A    Turn of the monitor and disconnect the line power before cleaning the monitor or the  sensor    A Warning A    Do not subject the sensor to autoclaving   Do not immerse the sensor into any liquid   Do not use any sensor or cable that may be damaged or deteriorated     Cleaning    m Use a cotton ball or a soft mull moistened with hospital grade ethanol to wipe the surface  of the sensor  and then dry it with a cloth  This cleaning method can also be applied to  the luminotron and receiving unit    m The cable can be cleaned with 3  hydrogen dioxide  70  isopropanol  or other active  reagent  However  connector of the sensor shall not be subjected to such solution        13 22 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     Chapter 14 NIBP Monitoring    14 1 Introduction    Reference to the European standard EN 1060 1  Specification for Non invasive   sphygmomanometers Part 1  General requirements    The Non invasive Blood Pressure  NIBP  module measures the blood pressure using the 
68.  or ethylene oxide     H Selecting a Masimo sensor     When selecting a sensor  consider  the patient   s weight  the adequacy of perfusion  the  available sensor sites  and the duration of monitoring  For more information refer to the  following table or contact Masimo  Use only Masimo sensors and sensor cables  Select an  appropriate sensor  apply it as directed  and observe all warnings and cautions presented in  the directions for use accompanying the sensor     High ambient light sources such as surgical lights especially those with a xenon light source    bilirubin lamps  fluorescent lights  infrared heating lamps  and direct sunlight can interfere with  the performance of an SpO2 sensor  To prevent interference from ambient light  ensure that  the sensor is properly applied  and cover the sensor site with opaque material  if required   Failure to take this precaution in high ambient light conditions may result in inaccurate  measurements                          LNOP ADT SINGLE USE ADULTS  gt  30 kg   LNOP PDT SINGLE USE Adults  gt 10 kg and  lt 50 kg   LNOP NEO SINGLE USE _ Neonate  lt 10 kg   LNOP NEO PT SINGLE USE Neonate  lt 1 kg or with poor skin integrity   LNOP DCI REUSABLE Adults and Pediatrics  gt 30 kg   LNOP DCIP REUSABLE Pediatrics  gt 10 kg and  lt 50 kg   LNOP DCSC REUSABLE Adult and Pediatrics  gt 30 kg for spot check applications  LNOP Ear sensor REUSABLE Adult Pediatric  gt 30 kg   LNOP YI Multi site REUSABLE Adult Pediatric Infant Neonatal  gt  1 kg  
69.  patient  Check the  connection of the electrodes  and lead wires           MISSED BEATS       Patient suffers from Arr  of  MISSED BEATS     Check the current situation of  the patient  Check the  connection of the electrodes  and lead wires        Check the connection of the       pacemaker   n i    Check the connection of  PNP The pacemaker is not paced  electrodes  Andi lead  wits   Check the current situation of  the patient   Check the connection of the  pacemaker    PNC  No pacemaker signal is   Check the connection of    captured     electrodes and lead wires   Check the current situation of  the patient            ECG LEAD OFF     ECG lead is not connected  correctly     Check the connection of ECG  lead wire         ECG V LEAD OFF      The V lead wire of ECG is not  connected correctly     Check the connection of V  lead wire         ECG LL LEAD OFF       ECG LA LEAD OFF      The LL lead wire of ECG is not  connected correctly   The LA lead wire of ECG is not  connected correctly     Check the connection of LL  lead wire   Check the connection of LA  lead wire         ECG RA LEAD OFF      The RA lead wire of ECG is not  connected correctly     Check the connection of RA  lead wire            ECG C LEAD OFF      The C lead wire of ECG is not  connected correctly     Check the connection of C  lead wire         ECG F LEAD OFF      The F lead wire of ECG is not  connected correctly     Check the connection of F  lead wire         ECG L LEAD OFF      The L lead wire of 
70.  recording  For further information on  alarm recording  please refer to Chapter Recording     5 6 When an Alarm Occurs    A Note A    When an alarm occurs  you should always check the patient s condition first     The alarm message appears at the top of the screen on the right side  It is needed to identify  the alarm and act appropriately  according to the cause of the alarm    1  Check the patient s condition    2  Identify the cause of the alarm    3  Silence the alarm  if necessary    4  When cause of alarm has been over  check that the alarm is working properly    You will find the alarm messages for the individual parameter in their appropriate parameter  chapters of this manual        5 6 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     Chapter6 Freeze    E General  m Freeze  amp  Unfreeze    m Review  amp  Record Frozen Waveforms    6 1 General    When monitoring a patient  you may freeze the waveforms of interest so as to view them  carefully  Generally you can review maximally 40 seconds of a frozen waveform  If required   you may also use recorder to print out a frozen waveform  The Freeze function of this monitor  has following features    a Freeze status can be activated on any operating screen     a At the same time of entering the Freeze status  the system exits all other operating  menus  Besides  the system freezes all waveforms in the Waveform area of the Basic  Screen  or Full lead ECG waveforms and the extra waveform  if available  on the  Full lead ECG screen 
71.  related chapter     AN warning     Always verify the self check function of audible and visual  LED  alarms when PM 9000  powers on     1 3 Button Functions    All the operations to PM 9000 are through the buttons and a knob at the bottom of the screen   The names of the buttons are above them  They are  from left to right  Figure 1 3         AE 0 0 OQ    Figure 1 3 PM 9000 Buttons and Knob    MAIN Figure 1 30    Whatever levels of menu the system is in  press the button and the system will always return  to the main screen      FREEZE Figure 1 30    Press this button and the system will access the FREEZE status  In this status the user may  review the waveform of 40 seconds  Also  the frozen waveform can be printed out  In the       1 8 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     Introduction    FREEZE status  press this button again to discharge the FREEZE status  For detailed  information  refer to related chapter  Freeze       SILENCE  Figure 1 30    Push this button to suspend alarm for maximum 3 minutes  with 1 minute  2 minutes and 3                minutes selectable   In Alarm PAUSE status  a     symbol appears in the Message Area   Push this button for more than 1 second to mute all kinds of sounds  including alarm sound     heart beat  pulse tone  key sound   At the same time  a EZ symbol appears in the    Message Area  Push this button again to restore all kinds of sounds and the E  symbol    disappears from the screen     AN Note A    If new alarm occurs in Alarm 
72.  temperature alarm function will not work during the C O  measurement  When  the measurement ends  the function will automatically resume        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  17 5    CO Measuring    WH The current blood temperature is displayed in the CO Parameter Area            Thermodilutio  Cathetern SS    Pulmonary  Artery       Balloon    Thermister    Right Atrium    Right Ventricle    Figure 17 4 Thermodilutio Cathetern Site    17 3 C O  SETUP Menu    H CO Setup and Adjustment  Pick the CO hot key on the screen to call up the C O  SELECT menu as shown below     GU  SELECT    GU  SETUP    C 0  MEASURE    Back to the upper menu     Figure 17 5 C O  SELECT Menu    Pick the C O SETUP button to access the submenu as shown below        17 6 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     CO Measuring    GU  SETUP    ALM ON    INJ TEMP FROM ON A    ALM LEV MED   _ INJ TEMP 2 0    ALM REC OFF v  TEMP UNIT L Z    TB ALM HI 39 0 INT TIME s  30    ah    TB ALM LO 36 0   DEFAULT  gt  gt   CO CONST 0 542      Open or close the TB alarm     EXIT    Figure 17 6 C O  SETUP Menu  H TB Alarm setup    ALM  Select    ON    to enable alarm prompt and data storage during TB alarm  Select     OFF    to disable audio alarm and prompt the 28 symbol beside TB numeric     A Warning A    During the cardiac output measurement procedure the blood temperature alarms will  be inactive       ALM REC  Select    ON    to enable recording during the TB alarm      ALM LEV  selectable from level HIGH
73.  the  patient weight and drug name  The system first gives a group of random initial values   which cannot be used by the operator as the calculation reference  Instead  he should  enter a new group of values at the doctor   s instruction     As Note A    Each drug has its fixed unit or unit series  Operator must select the proper unit at the  doctor   s instruction  If the result exceeds the system defined range  it will display               A Note AY    After entering a value  a conspicuous prompt will appear in the menu warning the  Operator to confirm the correctness of the entered value  The correct value is the  guaraniee for the reliability and safety of the calculated results     AN Note A    In neonate mode  Drip Rate and Drop Size items are disabled     A Note A    For each entered value  the system will always give a dialog box asking for the user   s  confirmation  You must be careful when answering each box  The calculated result is  reliable only after the entered value is confirmed to be correct                 Select the drug name  Turn the knob to pick the DRUG NAME item in DRUG CALC menu  The user may select the  drug name in the pull down list  including AMINOPHYLLINE    DOBUTAMINE   DOPAMINE    EPINEPHRINE   HEPARIN   ISUPREL   LIDOCAINE   NIPRIDE   NITROGLYCERING    PITOCIN   Drug AQ Drug BI  Drug C0 Drug D and Drug E Calculation for only one type can be                                  generated each time        NOTE   AQBUCQDEE are only codes for drugs
74.  the alarm area of the monitor while technical alarms and prompt messages  unable to trigger alarms are then displayed in the information area of the monitor  This section  does not describe the content about Arr  and ST analysis    Among physiological alarms  those belonging to the type that the parameter has exceeded  the limits may activate the recorder to automatically output the parameters and related  measured waveforms when the alarms occur on the condition that the alarm record switch in  the related menu is On    Tables below describe respectively the possible various alarms those may occur during the  measurement     Physiological alarms                 Message Cause Alarm level  ECG LOST No ECG signal of the patient is detected  HIGH  HR TOO HIGH HR measuring value is above the upper alarm limit User selectable  HR TOO LOW HR measuring value is below the lower alarm limit User selectable          Technical alarms     Alarm  EE EE  ECG LEAD OFF ECG electrodes fall off LOW Make sure that all      SAS the skin or ECG cables fall off electrodes  leads and  ECG V LEAD OFF or the monitor  patient cables are    properly connected   ECG C LEAD OFF    ECG LL LEAD OFF or  ECG F LEAD OFF                Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  12 11          ECG RESP Monitoring    ECG LALEAD OFF or  ECG LLEAD OFF  ECG RALEAD OFF or  ECG R LEAD OFF    ECG INIT ERR  ECG INIT ERR1  measuring function   ECGINITERRS   provided by ECG  ECG INIT ERR4 ECG module failure HIGH module  no
75.  the patient receives treatment   Patient No    Patient bed number  Range  1 100    Name of the doctor     Patient name  Valid characters  A Z  0 9 and space bar  Max  length  12  characters     Patient gender  Available options   F  for Female   M  for Male    Patient type  Available options  ADU  PED  and NEO    Hospitalization starting date  format  year month  day    Patient date of birth  format  year month day    Patient height  turning the knob with the increase decrease of 0 5 cm inch  each time The other HT  unit in the other menus accord with the unit which  you choosed here    Patient weight  turning the knob with the increase decrease of 0 5 kg Ib  each time The other WT  unit in the other menus accord with the unit which    you choosed here     Patient blood type  Pick A  B  O  AB  or N   N  represents unknown blood  type     Admission of new patient       3 2    Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     System Menu    Also in this menu  you may select the  NEW PATIENT  item to access the    CONFIRM TO  UPDATE PATIENT    dialog box as shown below  in which you can decide whether to monitor a  new patient     CONFIRM TO UPDATE PATIENT    All data of currently monitored    patient will be deleted  Yes         YES    Figure 3 3 Confirm To Update Patient Menu    Pick  YES  to delete all information of the patient being currently monitored and exit the menu   Pick  NO  to give up updating the patient and the system will keep the information of the  current patient an
76.  times minute                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        NIBP      From left to right  there are Systolic pressure  Mean pressure and Diastolic  pressure   unit  mmHg or kPa  SpO gt 2      SpO    unit         Pulse Rate   unit  beats minute    When    BOTH     item is selected  CO      CO unit  liter minute l      TBE unit    C or   F  IBP      The blood pressure of channel 1 and 2  From left to right  there are Systolic  pressure  Mean pressure and Diastolic pressure   unit  mmHg or kPa  RESP      Respiration Rate   unit  times minute  CO2      EtCO2   unit  mmHg or kPa      INS CO2  unit  mmHg or kPa       AwRR  times minute   TEMP        Temperature of channel 1 and 2  T1  T2 and the difference between them  TD   unit    C or  Pl          Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  1 7    Introduction    AG      AwRR  times minute       MAC      CO2 unit  mmHg or kPa        O2 unit    or mmHg or kPa       N2O unit    or mmHg or kPa        AdA unit    or mmHg or kPa   Alarm lamp and alarm status   In normal status  the alarm lamp is not on   When alarm exists  the alarm lamp flashes or lights on  The color of the lamp corresponds to  the alarm level  Refer to related chapter  Alarm   For the details of alarm information and prompt information  refer to the related content of  each parameter in
77.  value of channel 2 is HIGH  beyond measurement range    IBP2 MEAN EXCEED Mean measuring value of channel 2 is HIGH  beyond measurement range    IBP1 NEED ZERO CAL IBP channel 1 has not been zeroed  LOW   IBP2 NEED ZERO CAL IBP channel 2 has not been zeroed  LOW       16 6 Maintenance and Cleaning    16 6 1 Care and cleaning    A Warning A    Before cleaning the monitor or the transducer  turn off the power and disconnect  from power line     Cleaning of IBP Transducer  Reusable     After the IBP monitoring operation is completed  remove the tubing and the dome from the  transducer and wipe the transducer diaphragm with water  To clean the transducer and the  cable  soak or wipe them by using soap or the detergents listed below    Cetylcide   Wavicide 01   Wescodyne   Cidex   Lysol   Vesphene  Do not immerse the connector in any liquid  After cleaning  dry the transducer thoroughly  before storing  Slight discoloration or temporary increase of surface stickiness of the cable  should not be considered abnormal If adhesive tape residue must be removed from the  transducer cable  double seal tape remover is effective and will cause a minimum of damage  to the cable if used sparingly  Acetone  Alcohol  Ammonia and Chloroform  or other strong  solvents are not recommended because over time the vinyl cabling will be damaged by these       Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  16 11    IBP Monitoring    agents     A Note A    The disposable transducers or domes must not be re ster
78.  will be a great deal of interference  with the ECG signal     WH Using 5 lead ECG set  The default setting is ECG CH1 corresponding to Channel Il  and ECG CH2 to Channel     you can modify the setting to meet your needs  You can set them to correspond to any  two from    Il  Ill  AVR  AVL  AVF and V  If you set both to the same value  one of them will  be adjusted to another option automatically   Figure 12 3        Figure 12 3 ECG lead    A Note A    If a ECG waveform is not accurate  while the electrodes are tightly attached  try to  change the lead     AN Note A    Interference from a non grounded instrument near the patient and ESU interference  can cause inaccuracy of the waveform     Normal QRS complex should be   o Tall and narrow with no notches   o With tall R wave completely above or below the baseline        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  12 5    ECG RESP Monitoring    o With pacer spike no higher than R wave height   With T wave less than one third of the R wave height     o  o With P wave much smaller than the T wave   For getting 1 mv calibrated ECG wave  choose ECG CAL button in ECG SETUP menu  A    message  when CAL  can t monitor   prompts on the screen     Figure 12 4 Standard ECG Waveform    AN Warning A    Do not touch the patient  table nearby  or the equipment during defibrillation     12 4 ECG Screen Hot Keys       the hot key for ECG    Figure 12 5    O Leads of channel 1   10 The selectable leads are I  Il  III  aVR  aVL  aVF  V   20 When th
79.  with V4 electrode    m V3R V7R On the right side of the chest in positions corresponding to those on the  left    E VE Over the xiphoid position    gm V7 On the 5th intercostal space at the left posterior axillary line of back    mgm V7R On the 5th intercostal space at the right posterior axillary line of back        Figure 12 2 C electrode placement for 12 lead set    Recommended ECG Lead Placement for Surgical Patients    A Warning A    When using Electrosurgery equipment  leads should be placed in a position in equal  distance from Electrosurgery electrotome and the grounding plate to avoid cautery   Electrosurgery equipment wire and ECG cable must not be tangled up     The placing of the ECG leads will depend on the type of surgery that is being performed  For  example  with open chest surgery the electrodes may be placed laterally on the chest or on  the back  In the operating room  artifacts can sometimes affect the ECG waveform due to the  use of ES  Electrosurgery  equipment  To help reduce this you can place the electrodes on       12 4 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     ECG RESP Monitoring    the right and left shoulders  the right and left sides near the stomach  and the chest lead on  the left side at mid chest  Avoid placing the electrodes on the upper arms  otherwise the ECG  waveform will be too small     A Warning AN    When using Electrosurgery equipment  never place an electrode near the grounding  plate of the Electrosurgery device  otherwise there
80. 0   150 mmHg  20   165 mmHg  40   135 mmHg  10   95 mmHg   20   105 mmHg    1mmHg     5mmHg    Maximum Standard deviation    Overpressure Protection  Adult Mode  Pediatric Mode    Neonatal Mode    2 11 SpO2    Measuring Range  Alarm Range  Resolution  Accuracy    Actualization interval  Alarm Delay  Pulse Rate  Measuring and Alarm Range  Resolution  Accuracy  MASIMO Specification   Range  Saturation  SpO2   Pulse Rate bmp     8mmHg    29743 mmHg  240 3 mmHg    14743 mmHg    0  100    0  100   1    70    100   0    69   about 1 Sec    10  Sec       2    unspecified    0 254bpm  1bpm   2bpm or   2   use the greater    1  100   25 240       Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  5    Production Specification    Accuracy  Saturation  SpO2   Adults pediatric                Neonates       Saturation  SpO2              During No Motion Conditions       70    1000  2   0    69  unspecified  70    100  3   0    69  unspecified                                           During Motion Conditions       Adults  pediatric  Neonates 70    100    3                          0    69  unspecified             Pulse bpm  During No Motion Condition                25 to 240   3BPM    Pulse bpm  During Motion Condition       Resolution  Saturation  SpO2   Pulse Rate bpm     2 12 TEMPERATURE    Channel   Measuring and Alarm Range  Resolution   Accuracy   Actualization interval  Average Time Constant    2 13 IBP    Channel   Label   Measuring and alarm range  ART  PA  CVP RAP LAP ICP  P1 P2   Press Se
81. 0 mg VOLUME 250 00 ml  DOSE hr 150 00 mg INF RATE 93 75 mlhr  WEIGHT 70 0 kg DRIP RATE 31 25 GTTvmin    DOSE INF RATE DOSE INF RATE DOSE INF RATE    H   1   2   3   4   5   6   7   8   9              BASIC   DOSE x  STEP 1   DOSE TYPE DOSE hr Z    UP DOUN REC    Use one item as input  calculate the other one     EXIT    Figure 9 2 TITRATION    H Method to operate the titration table    1  In the TITRATION table  turn the knob to pick BASIC item  Press and turn the knob to  select either FLOW RATE or DOSE or DROP RATE    2  Then turn the knob to pick STEP item  Press and turn the knob to select step  1   10 are  available for selection with the increment being 1        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  9 3    Drug Calculation and Titration Table    3  Turn the knob to pick DOSE TYPE item  Press and turn the knob to select the unit in the  pull down list   Use UP DOWN item in the table to view the data in previous or following pages   Turn the knob to pick REC item  After pressing the knob  the recorder prints out the data  displayed in the current titration table   6  Turn the knob to pick EXIT to return to DRUG CALC menu   Total amount  dose  volume  flow rate  drop rate and patient weight and drug name are  displayed on the top of the titration table  Meaning of each English identifier is   AMOUNT   drug amount  VOLUMEQ  liquid volume  DOSE min   drug dose  FLOW RATE  flow rate  DROP RATE   drop rate  WEIGHT   patient weight                                             
82. 144 x264 mm  5 5 kg    0   40    C    35  C   40  C   40  C   20 60    C                     10  C                      15   85    10   93   noncomdensing      500 to 4 600m  1 600 to 15 000ft    500 to 13 100m  1 600 to 43 000ft        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     Production Specification    Power Supply    2 3 Display    Device  Messages    2 4 Signal Interface    External display    ECG Output  Amplitude  Accuracy  Impedance  Signal Delay   NURSE CALL output    100 250  V  AC  50 60  Hz   Pmax 110VA  FUSE T1 6    12 1  in   Color TFT  800 x 600 Resolution  3 LED  8 Waveforms Maximum   1Alarm LED  Yellow Red    1 Power LED  Green    1 Charge LED  Green    3 Sound Mode corresponding Alarm Mode    Standard VGA  BNC   1V    lt 5    100  ohm    lt 20  ms     NURSE CALL function is realized through external NURSE CALL cable     Output signal type   Max  voltage   Max  load current   On resistance    Isolation voltage     2 5 Battery  Rechargeable Lead Acid    Operating time under the normal condition    NORMAL OPEN NORMAL CLOSE is software controlled    36V DC OR 25V AC  1A   lt 10  1500VAC  2 3Ah 12V    100 minutes  2 batteries     Operating time after the first alarm of low battery  gt 5 minutes    Maximum charging time of single battery is 4 hours  Maximum charging time of two batteries    is 8 hours     2 6 Recorder  Option     Record Width  Paper Speed  Trace   Recording types     48  mm   25 50 mm s   2    Continuous real time recording  8 second real time re
83. 15 45 6 z0       01 15 44 6 2       01 15 43 6 2       01 15 42 EE   01 15 41 Soi An   01 15 40 EEN   01 15 39 cs E   01 15 38 E   01 15 37 EE    RESOLUTION   1MIN x  UP DOWN L RIGHT REC    Select the time interval used to view the trend data  of the parameter     EXIT    Figure 8 2 TREND TABLE Menu    Time in response to each group of trend data is displayed at the leftmost list with date in  bracket  Marked event corresponds to marking time  Trend data of each parameter is divided  into 8 groups   HR  RR  PVC  ST1  ST2  TEMP1  TEMP2  TEMPD  SPO2  PR  NIBP NS ND  NM   IBP1  S D M   IBP2  S D M   CO2  INS  AWRR  TB  NIBP trend data presents different specificity  A certain NIBP measuring time is displayed  below the TEST AT item  as well as the measurement value  For more than one measurement  in one time  it can display only one group  and mark a     on the MORE to indicate two and  above measurement results     To choose trend table of different resolution  Pick the leftmost item and change the time interval of trend data   To view other trend data     When  A   appears on the upper part of the screen  pick UP DOWN button and turn the knob  clockwise to view later trend data  When  4  appears on the lower part of the screen  pick the       Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  8 3    Trend and Event    same item and turn the knob counterclockwise to view earlier trend data   To obtain trend data of different parameter    Pick L RIGHT to select one from the 8 groups of par
84. 2 DryerSample Line with TEE HH   008 0784 00 EtCO2 DryerSample Line  HH  No TEE   008 0780 00 EtCO2 DryerSample Line with TEE LH   008 0782 00 EtCO2 Dryer   008 0789 00 Adult Nasal Sampling Line  soft   008 0786 00 Adult O2 Delivery Sampling Line  008 0790 00 Pediatric Nasal Sampling Line Soft  008 0785 00 Pediatric O2 Deliver Nasal SampleLine  008 0788 00 Infant EtCO2 Nasal Sampling Line Soft  008 0783 00 Infant O2 Deliver Nasal SampleLine  2 5mm 008 0766 00 InfantConnecter with Sideport  008 0779 00 Adult Pediatric Sampling TEE       Sampling LineNeonate2 5m purchase Nol  60 15300 00  Sampling ELBOW  BOX OF 50   P N 000 91167   Sampling SATRAIGHT CTEE connector   DRYLINE WATER TRAP NEONATER 60 13200 00              MAINSTREAM SENSOR II  P N 000 59000   AIRWAY ADAPTER ADULT  BOX OF 10  P N 000 91060   AIRWAY ADAPTER LDS BOX OF 10  P N 000 91070     P N 6000 10 02107  P N 900E 10 04882  P N 0010 10 12176  P N 0010 10 12208    P N 6000 10 02079  P N 6000 10 02080  P N 6000 10 02081  P N 900E 30 04952    P N 0010 10 12082  P N 0010 10 12083  P N 0010 10 12084  P N 0010 10 12085  P N 0010 10 12086  P N 0010 10 12087  P N 0010 10 12088  P N 0010 10 12089  P N 0010 10 12090  P N 0010 10 12091  P N 0010 10 12092  P N 0010 10 12093  P N 9200 10 10555  P N 9000 10 07297  P N 9200 10 10593  P N 9200 10 10574  P N 9000 10 07299  P N 9000 10 07301  P N 9000 10 07302       20 4 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     Accessories and Ordering Information    20 8 Anesthetic Gas Accessor
85. 250 VAC   50 60 Hz    m   Apply the power line provided with the monitor  Plug the power line to INPUT interface of       the monitor Socket in Figure 1 6   Connect the other end of the power line to a             grounded 3 phase power output     A Note A    Connect the power line to the jack special for hospital usage     A Note A    Mindray does not provide MULTIPLE PORTABLE SOCKET OUTLETS  IF use it  please  do not place it on the floor  Mindray advises that every one monitor uses one  MULTIPLE PORTABLE SOCKET OUTLETS     m Connect to the ground line if necessary  Refer to Chapter Patient Safety for details        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  2 1    Getting Started    A Note AY    Make sure that the POWER lamp now lights  If it does not light  check your local power  supply  If the problem still exists  contact the local Customer Service Center     A Note A    The battery need to be charged after transportation or storage  If the power supply is  not properly connected before turning on the monitor  it may not work properly  because of insufficient power  Connect the power supply to charge the battery     2 3 Power on the Monitor       Press POWER    in Figure 1 1  to power on the monitor  Then a beep will be heard and at             the same time the indicator will flash twice in yellow and red  After 10 seconds or so  the  system will enter monitoring screen after self test  and you can perform normal monitoring  now    During self test  the software version 
86. 4 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     Chapter 13 SpO2 Monitoring    13 1 PART 1  MASIMO SpO2 board configuration     OMAsiNo SEI     General description    SpO  is a non invasive measurement of the functional oxygen saturation    The measurement is taken by placing a sensor on a patient   usually on the fingertip for adults   and the hand or foot for neonates  The sensor is connected to the patient monitor with pulse  oximetry measurement module  Masimo Set  which is called MS 7   The monitor displays the  calculated data from MS 7 in three ways  1 as a percent value for arterial oxygen saturation   SpOz    2 as a pulse rate  PR  and 3 as a plethysmographic waveform on the screen     Principles of Operation    This MS 7 is based on three principles     H Oxyhemoglobin and deoxyhemoglobin differ in their absorption of red and infrared  light spectrophotometry     m   The volume of arterial blood in tissue and the light absorbed by the blood changes during  the pulse plethysmography    m   Arterio venous shunting is highly variable and that fluctuating absorbance by venous  blood is a major component of noise during the pulse    This MS 7 determines SpO  by passing red and infrared light into a capillary bed and   measuring changes in light absorption during the pulsatile cycle  Red and infrared   light emitting diodes  LEDs  in oximetry sensors serve as the light sources  a photodiode   serves as the photodetector     Traditional pulse oximeter assumes that all pulsatio
87. 5 4  12 9    ECG RESP Monitoring    to the chapter about SPO2 to know the detailed information about PITCH TONE     PACE   ON  detected signal will be marked by a     above the ECG waveform   OFF  for non pacemaking patient    AY Note AY    If monitoring a patient with the pacemaker  set    PACE    to On  If monitoring a patient  without pacemaker  set    PACE    to Off    If    PACE    is on  the system will not perform some types of ARR analysis  For detailed  information  please refer to the section  ARR ALARM  In the table  the ARR type marked  by All types applies to the analysis in all situations  marked by Non paced applies only  to the analysis in the situation when the patient does not use pacemaker     CASCADE  switch for ECG cascade  CASCADE  wave of each channel is displayed in  two lines  This function effects only when NORMAL DISPLAY is selected for ECG  DISPLAY    ECG CAL  pick this item to start calibrating ECG  The method to end CAL  re select the  CAL key in the menu or re select the lead name on the screen    ADJUST WAVE POS  used to adjust the position of the waveform on the screen  Pick to  access ADJUST WAVE POS dialog box  The user may use CH NAME item to select the  channel to be adjusted  UP DOWN to adjust the position of the selected channel on the  screen  BACK TO DEFAULT to let the wave go back to the default position on the    screen   ADJUST WAVE POS  CH NAME  CH1       UP DOUN  BACK TO DEFAULT    Select the wave channel to  be adjusted     EXIT 
88. AN Warning A    ES  Electrosurgery  equipment wire and SpO  cable must not be tangled up     A Warning A    Do not put the sensor on extremities with arterial catheter or venous syringe     A Note A       13 14    Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     SpO   Monitoring    Do not perform SpO  measuring and NIBP measuring on same arm at one time   because obstruction of blood flow during NIBP measuring may adversely affect the  reading of SpO  value     13 2 2 Precautions during SpO2 Pulse Monitoring  AN Note AN    E Make sure the nail covers the light window   E The wire should be on the backside of the hand     AN Note A    WE SpO  value is always displayed at the same position   m  Pulse Rate will be displayed only under following situations     Select HR FROM as  SPO2  or    BOTH    in the ECG SETUP menu     Select HR FROM as    AUTO    in the ECG SETUP menu and there is no ECG  signal     AN Note AY    SpO  waveform is not proportional to the pulse volume     A Warning A    Check if the sensor cable is in normal condition before monitoring  After unplugging  the SpO  sensor cable from the socket  the system shall display the error message     SPO2 SENSOR OFF    and give the audible alarm     AN Warning AN    Do not use the SpO2 sensor once the package or the sensor is found damaged  Instead   you shall return it to the vendor     A Warning A    Prolonged and continuous monitoring may increase jeopardy of unexpected change of  dermal condition such as abnormal sensitivi
89. BP Channel 1 SYS  DIA  MAP    Channel 2 SYS  DIA  MAP  Dual IBP waveforms             CO Blood Temperature  TB   Cardiac Output  CO   CO2 End Tidal CO2    EtCO2 0       Inspired Minimum CO2  InsCO2           1 4 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     Introduction       Air Way Respiration Rate  AwRR           AG Inhale and exhale CO2  FiCO2  EtCO2    Inhale and exhale N2O  FiN2O  EtN20    Inhale and Exhale O2  FiO2  EtO2    Inhale and exhale anesthetic agent  FIAA  ETAA  Note  AA refers  to one of anesthetic agents listed below    HAL  Halothance    ISO  Isoflurance    ENF  Enflurance    SEV  Sevoflurance    DES  Desflurance    Airway Respiration Rate  respiratory times per minute  unit  rpm   AwRR   MAC Minimum alveolar concentration    Waveforms of four anesthetic gases including CO2  N2O  02  AA          PM 9000 provides extensive functions as visual  amp  audible alarm  storage and report printout  for trend data  NIBP measurements  and alarm events  oxyCRG  viewbed  and drug dose  calculation function is provided either     1 2 Screen Display    The display of PM 9000 parameter monitor is a color LCD  which can display the collected  patient parameters  waveforms  alarm information as well as bed number  time and monitor  status  etc    The screen is divided into three areas Figure 1 2   Information area        waveform areal     parameter area                      EE  e a  SC ES  d  r    Figure 1 2 PM 9000 Main Display    Information Area   The Message Area is at th
90. ECG is not  connected correctly     Check the connection of L  lead wire         ECG R LEAD OFF      The R lead wire of ECG is not  connected correctly     Check the connection of R  lead wire              SPO2 SENSOR OFF       SpO2 sensor may be  disconnected from the  patient or the monitor        Make sure that the monitor  and the patient are in correct  connection with the cables           Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4        System Alarm Prompt       SPO2 INIT ERR       SPO2 INIT ERR 1       SPO2 INIT ERR 2       SPO2 INIT ERR 3       SPO2 INIT ERR 4       SPO2 INIT ERR 5       SPO2 INIT ERR 6       SPO2 INIT ERR 7       SPO2 INIT ERR 8    SpO  module failure    Stop using the measuring  function of SpO module   notify biomedical engineer or  Our service staff        SPO2 COMM STOP    SpO2 module failure or  communication error    Stop using the measuring  function of SpO module   notify biomedical engineer or  Our service staff        SPO2 COMM ERR    SpO2 module failure or  communication error    Stop using the measuring  function of SpO module   notify biomedical engineer or  Our service staff        SPO2 ALM LMT ERR    Functional safety failure    Stop using the measuring  function of SpO module   notify biomedical engineer or  Our service staff        PR ALM LMT ERR    Functional safety failure    Stop using the measuring  function of SpO module   notify biomedical engineer or  Our service staff        MASIMO Alarm information        SpO2 NO SENSOR    Sens
91. ER OUT OF PAPER  alarm is displayed  the recorder cannot start  Please  insert record paper properly     Inserting Paper    WH Open the recorder catch    RW Pull down the switch on the left axis of the recorder    WH Insert a new roll of paper into the paper cassette  printing side facing the thermosensitive  printhead    m When the paper can be seen from the other side  pull it out  Ensure proper position and  tidy margin    m Pull back the switch on the left axis of the recorder    RW Give out the paper from the recorder outlet    mM Close the recorder catch     A Note A    Be careful when inserting paper  Avoid damaging the thermosensitive printhead   Unless when inserting paper or shooting troubles  do not leave the recorder catch  open     Removing Paper Jam    When the recorder functions or sounds improperly  open the recorder catch to check for a  paper jam  Removing the paper jam in the following way     Cut the record paper from the feeding edge   Pull up the switch on the left axis of the recorder   Pull the paper from below     Re insert the paper     Recorder Status Message  Technical Alarms        Message Cause Alarm Remedy  Level  RECORDER HEAD The thermal terminal is   Stop operation  HOT too hot  ow  The thermal head is not Push down the switch on  Ee in recording place  low the left axis of the    recorder           7 6 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     Recording                                                          RECORDER OUT OF Record paper ru
92. ES OCCURRING DURING SPO2  MEASUREMENT     Physiological alarm              Message   Cause Alarm Level  SPO TOO HIGH te ia value is above upper alarm Eerst  SpO2 TOO LOW SpO2 measuring value is below lower alarm limit  User selectable  PR TOO HIGH PR measuring value is above upper alarm limit  User selectable  PR TOO LOW PR measuring value is below lower alarm limit  User selectable                   Technical alarms     Q   ere Q          May be an incorrect sensor  or  a defective sensor or cable     Sensor not fully inserted MEEN a PENRO   ato  A          LOW connector  Disconnect and  SpO2 NO DEER reconnect sensor  Refer to the  instructions for the sensor  SENSOR being used   Sencar inserted Disconnect and reconnect he  ide dow   LOW sensor with the logos  ups   matching   SpO2 SENSOR SpO2 sensor may be Disconnect and reconnect the  disconnected from the   LOW sensor                    Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  13 11       SpO2 Monitoring                                  Sp02 Stop using the measuring  SE This message appears HIGH function of SpO2 module   FAULT when the sensor is faulty notify biomedical engineer or  our service staff   SpO02   Make sure that the monitor  UNRECOGNIZED M Liar ate de net LOW and the patient are in correct  SENSOR cog   connection with the cables   Sp02 This message is  displayed when the Make sure that the monitor  pecan masimo sensor is finding Se use incompatible sensor   incompatible sensor   SpO2 Outside signal or energy 
93. Electromagnetic propagation is affected  by absorption and reflection from structures  objects and people           Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  3          Appendix IV    System Alarm Prompt          PROMPT CAUSE MEASURE  n i XX value exceeds the higher  EK alarm limit  Check if the alarm limits are  appropriate and the current   XX TOO LOW  XX value is below the lower   situation of the patient     alarm limit        XX represents the value of parameter such as HR  ST1  ST2  RR  SpO2  IBP  NIBP  etc in the system        The ECG signal of the patient    Check if the electrodes and  lead wires are connected                                        ECG WEAK SIGNAL is too small so that the system correctly and the current  can not perform ECG analysis  Se    situation of the patient   The pulse signal of the patient   Check the connection of the     NO PULSE    is too small so that the system   sensor and the current  can not perform pulse analysis    situation of the patient   The respiration Signal  orahe Check the connection of the  i i patient is too small so that the   p     RESP APNEA linking wire and the current  system cannot perform RESP   n o      situation of the patient   analysis   ANG respiration signal  or Ihe Check the connection of CO2  a    i patient is too small so that the  CO2 APNEA sensor and the current  system cannot perform RESP    gt  lt        situation of the patient   analysis   Check the current situation of    i Patient suffers from Arr  O
94. F surgical equipment  do not let the transducer and  cable contact the HF surgical equipment to prevent the patient from burning caused by  leakage current        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  16 1    IBP Monitoring    A Warning A    Disposable IBP transducer or domes should not be reused     A Note A    Use only the pressure transducer specified in this operation manual        The specified transducef  except for ICT B transducer   has the function of protecting against  the electric shock  especially the leakage current  and the influence of cardiac defibrillator  It                can be used in surgical operation  When the patient is in the defibrillation  the pressure  waveform may become temporarily distorted  However the monitor will work normally after  defibrillation with the operation mode and user configuration being not affected     A Warning A    Inspect the transducer cable is in normal condition before monitoring  Unplug the  transducer of the channel 1  the monitor should display the error message    IBP   SENSOR 1 OFF    and trigger audible alarm  The other channel should act the same     A Note A    Periodically calibrate the transducer either new or used according to the Hospital  Regulation     A Warning A    If any kind of liquid  other than the solution to be infused in the pressure line or  transducer  is splashed on the equipment or its accessories  especially enters the  transducer or the monitor  contact the Service Center of the Hospital i
95. IEC 60601 Compliance Electromagnetic environment      munity test Test level level guidance  Conducted RF   3 Vrms 150kHz   3 Vrms Recommended separation distance   IEC 61000 4 6 to 80MHz d 1 2x  p  2 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4           EMC       Recommended separation distance   d 1 2xJP 80MHz to 800MHz  d 2 3x  p 800MHz to 2 5GHz  Where P is the maximum output power  rating of the transmitter in watts  W  according to  the transmitter manufacturer and d is the  recommended separation distance in meters  Radiated RF   3 V m 80MHz 3 V m  m    IEC 61000 4 3 to 2 5 GHz Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters   as determined by an electromagnetic site survey     should be less than the compliance level in  each frequency range  H  Interference may occur in the vicinity of  equipment marked with the following symbol     Bei  a                     Field strengths from fixed transmitters  such as base stations for radio  cellular cordless  telephones    and land mobile radios  amateur radio  AM and FM radio broadcast  and TV broadcast cannot be  predicted theoretically with accuracy  To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF  transmitters  an electromagnetic site survey should be considered  If the measured field strength in the  location in which the monitor is used exceeds the applicable RF compliance level above  the monitor  should be observed to verify normal operation  If abnormal performance is observed  additional  measures may be necessary  
96. IMO SPOZ SETUP  ALM PR ALM LO 5 s    ALM LEV MED   SWEEP 25 0  gt    ALM REC OFF   PR SOUND 2 X  SP02 ALM HI 100   AVG TIME 8S v    SP0Z ALM LO 90  gt  SENSITIVITY MODE NORMAL    PR ALM HI 126   DEFAULT  gt  gt     Open or close the Sp02 alarm     EXIT    Figure 13 2 SpO2 SETUP menu    A Warning A    Setting the SpO   upper alarm limit to 100  is equivalent to switching off the alarm on  upper limit  High oxygen levels may predispose a premature infant to retrolental  fibroplasia  Therefore  the upper alarm limit for oxygen saturation must be carefully  selected in accordance with commonly accepted clinical practices     SpO gt  alarm setting   e ALM  pick  ON  to enable prompt message and data record during the SpO  alarm    pick  OFF  to disable the alarm function  and there will be a 4 beside    SpO        e ALM REC  pick  ON  to enable report printing upon SpO  alarm    e ALM LEV  used to set up alarm level  selectable from HIGH  MED and LOW  HIGH  represents the most serious case    e SpO2 ALM HI and SpO2 ALM LO SpO2 alarm is activated when the result exceeds set  SpO2 ALM HI value or falls below SpO2 ALM LO value  Use the knob to pick the SpO2  ALM HI or SpO2 ALM LO item and turn the knob to select the desired alarm limit    e PR ALM HI and PR ALM LO  PR alarm is activated when the pulse rate exceeds set  PR ALM HI value or falls below PR ALM LO value  Use the knob to pick the PR ALM  HI or PR ALM LO item and turn the knob to select the desired alarm limit     A Warning
97. LL signal is synchronous with the  alarm signal designated in the triggering condition   m SIGNAL TYPE     NORMAL OPEN    or    NORMAL CLOSE      NORMAL OPEN  select this item when the CALL system of the hospital is set to     NORMAL OPEN      NORMAL CLOSE  select this item when the CALL system of the hospital is set to     NORMAL CLOSE      WH ALMLEV and ALM TYPE  after NURSE CALL function is activated  the monitor provides       Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  3 15    System Menu    the following combination options of alarm level and alarm type for the user to choose in  order to trigger NURSE CALL signal     ALM LEV    provides three combination options  i e    NURSE CALL signal will be triggered when it is    HIGH    alarm     MED    alarm or    LOW     alarm     ALM TYPE    provides two combination options  i e   NURSE CALL signal will be  triggered when it is    TECH    alarm or    PHYS    alarm     AY Warning AY    When no option in    ALM TYPE    is selected  the NURSE CALL signal will not be  triggered in whatever condition     A Warning A   When in ALARM SILENCE PAUSE status  the monitor will automatically switch off  NURSE CALL signal  after discharging ALARM SILENCE PAUSE status  the monitor will  automatically return to the status before ALARM SILENCE PAUSE is activated    If the user select    CLOSE    in the ALARM SOUND item of the    USER MAINTAIN    menu   it will does not affect the function of NURSE CALL     A Warning A  The nurse call feature shou
98. M OFF     opp RELEARN  ALM LEU MED   ARR ALARM  gt  gt   ALM REC OFF   ARR RECALL  gt  gt     Perform Arr  analysis only when  the switch is On     EXIT    Figure 12 12 ARR ANALYSIS Menu    m ARRANAL  Pick  ON  during monitoring  Default set is  OFF     m PVCs ALM  pick  ON  to enable prompt message and data record when alarm occurs   pick  OFF  to disable the alarm function  and there will be a    beside    PVCs       m ALM LEV  selectable from HIGH  MED  LOW  Level HIGH represents the most serious  case    m ALM REC  pick  ON  to enable report printing upon PVCs alarm   PVCs alarm is activated when the PVCs exceeds set PVCs ALM HI value        12 16 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     ECG RESP Monitoring    PVCs alarm upper limits     Max Min Step    PVCs 10 1 1   PVCs alarm and prompt message    Among physiological alarms  those belonging to the type that the parameter has exceeded  the limits may activate the recorder to automatically output the parameters and related  measured waveforms when the alarms occur on the condition that the alarm record switch in  the related menu is On     Tables below describe the possible physiological alarms  technical alarms and prompt  messages occurring during pyvcs measurement     Physiological alarms     Message Cause Alarm Level       PVCs TOO HIGH   PVCs measuring value is above upper alarm User selectable  limit     Technical alarms        Message Cause Alarm Level Remedy       Stop using PVCs alarming    Functional safety fu
99. OFF    and enter Silence  or Pause status     A Note A    After the alarm volume is set to OFF  a al symbol will appear in the Technical Alarm    Area     AY Note AY    Setting Alarm Volume to    OFF    is valid only when the monitor is turned on for this time   After turning on the monitor next time  this setup will restore its value of the previous  time when the system is turned on     COLOR SELF DEFINE  is used by the user to define the color of the waveform displayed on  the screen  Five colors can be chosen from  green  cyan  red  yellow and white        3 14 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     System Menu    COLOR SELF DEF INE    ECG WAVE  amp  PARA GREEN  gt    SPO02 WAVE  amp  PARA CYAN    4    IBP WAVE  amp  PARA RED v  COZ WAVE  amp  PARA YELLOW    4    RESP WAVE  amp  PARA YELLOW    4    4    AG WAVE  amp  PARA YELLOW  OTHER PARA WHITE    Back to the upper menu     Figure 3 21 Color Self define  NURSE CALL SETUP  If the NURSE CALL item in AUX OUTPUT being selected  the NURSE  CALL SETUP submenu will be available     NURSE CALL SETUP    4    SIGNAL DURATION   CONTINUUM  gt      SIGNAL TYPE NORMAL OPEN     ALM LEV ALM TYPE  v HIGH v TECH    MED PHYS     LOW  Select Nurse call signal  duration    EXIT    Figure 3 22 Nurse Call Setup  m SIGNAL DURATION     PULSE    and    CONTINUUM    two types of signals are available   Selecting    PULSE    indicates that the NURSE CALL is the pulse signal of 1s duration   selecting    CONTINUUM    indicates that the NURSE CA
100. OH    Tl  Injectate Temperature  If necessary  change can be performed in the    C O   SETUP    menu   O Function keys     START Start a measurement     If the blood temperature cannot resume in a considerably long time   STOP the measurement could not stop automatically  Use this button to  stop the measurement and display the C O  C I  calculation result        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  17 3    CO Measuring    Cancel the processing measurement or cancel the result after    CANGEE measurement    REC Print out the curve   Change the scale Y  temperature  value  Three modes are   Scale Y available  0   0 5  C  0   1 0  C  and 0   2 0  C  Adjust the scale by the  temperature differences  A smaller scale results in a larger curve   Change the scale X  time  value  Two modes are available  0   30s  and 0   60s  If you start measurement in the 0   30s mode  it will be   Scale X switched to 0   60s mode automatically if the measurement can not  finish within 30 seconds  After the switch  no further adjustment can  be made to the Scale X    Edit Enter the WINDOW FOR C O  EDIT    Exit Press to exit the WINDOW FOR C O  MEASUREMENT     m Measuring the Cardiac Output   Measurement should be taken when the message    Ready for new measurement    appears on  the screen    in the Figure 17 2   Press the START button  and then start injection  The  thermodilution curve  current blood temperature and the injectate temperature are displayed                during the measurement 
101. ONFIG or the USER DEFAULT  CONFIG is to be used  After selecting any of the items and exiting the dialog box  the  system will pop up the dialog box asking for the user   s confirmation    m EXIT  used to exit the menu and return to the main screen     17 4 Hemodynamic Calculation    m Hemocalculation  Pick the    HEMO CALCULATE    in the WINDOWS FOR C O EDIT Window to display input    parameter value and list calculation results     HEMOD WINDOW    RESULT    CIC1 minsm 2       EFC         SU m1       SUI  m1m 2        SUR DS cm 5       SURI  DSem 2 cm 5        PUR DS cm 5       PURI  DScem 2 cm 5         LCW kg m      LCWI Ckg m m 2      LUSU  g m      LUSUI  g m7m 2         RCW Ckg m          RCWI  kg m7m 2        RUSU  g m       RUSY I  g m7m 2        BSA m 2  1 811   INPUT VALUE  Lu P 50 s  PAUP mmHg   8    AP MAPcmmhg  93    CUP  mmHg  12   PA MAP  mmHhg          COCl min          HT  cm  175 0    HR 60   UT Kg  70 0     CALCULATE REC  EXIT    Figure 17 7 HEMOD Windows    Turn the rotary knob  you can change the value of the parameter that the cursor appears on  by picking it  Pick    CALCULATE    after input of all parameter values  the calculation results will       17 8 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     CO Measuring    be displayed in the window  Pick    REC    can print out all the calculation results     Input parameter value     m PAWP  Pulmonary Artery Wedge Pressure  m CVP  Central Venous Pressure   E CO  Cardiac Output   m HR  Heart Rate   m AP MAP  Mea
102. OR  6PIN SPO2 cable   6PIN SPO2 trunk cable  KIT    m NELLCO ACCESSORIES     DS 100A finger sensor   OXI P I pediatric sensor   NELLCO Adult Neonate wrapping SPO2 sensor  OXI A N   m MINDRAY ACCESSORIES     512B finger SPO2 sensor   Finger SPO2 sensor   518A multi function SPO2 sensor  6PIN SPO2 sensor trunk cable  6PIN SPO2 sensor trunk cable    P N 9000 30 07470  P N 0010 30 12262  P N 0010 30 12263  P N 0010 30 12264  P N 0010 30 12265  P N 0010 30 12266  P N 0010 30 12267  P N 0010 30 12268  P N 0010 30 12269    P N 0010 10 12080  P N 0010 10 12304  P N 0509 10 00094  P N 900E 10 04879  P N 900E 10 04880    P N 0010 10 12274  P N 0010 10 12101  P N 9200 30 10682  P N 9200 30 10707    P N 9000 10 05161  P N 9000 10 07308  P N 9000 10 07336    P N 512B 30 90134  P N 512D 30 90200  P N 518A 30 90226  P N 0513 30 11220   P N 512D 30 16752       20 2 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     Accessories and Ordering Information    20 3 NIBP Accessories    m Reusable cuff                                                    Patient Type Limb perimeter PN Factory PN  Infant 10 19 cm 0010 30 12157 CM1201  Child 18 26 cm 0010 30 12158 CM1202  Adult 25 35 cm 0010 30 12159 CM1203   Large Adult 33 47 cm 0010 30 12160 CM1204  Thigh 46 66 cm 0010 30 12161 CM1205  Adult 25 35 cm 0010 30 12059 W A BAUM  Child 18 26 cm 0010 30 12060 W A BAUM  Infant 10 19 cm 0010 30 12061 W A BAUM   Pediatric 6 11 cm 0010 30 12067 W A BAUM  Adult 25 35 cm 509B 30 08845 CM1203 1       m Disposable cuff     
103. P     is    always displayed on the screen until the sensor reaches to the operating temperature    After CO2 module is activated and enters the normal status  for MainStream     MAIN    is  displayed following CO2 waveform identifier  and for SideStream  the    SIDE    is displayed  following CO2 waveform identifier     Watertrap       Nafion tube          Mainstream  07 Sensor    Airway    SE Adapter    Figure 18 1 Sidestream Connection Figure 18 2 Mainstram Connection    E Do not use the sterile supplied CO2 Water trap set  for side stream including water trap    and sample line and cannula  and Air adapter  for main stream  if the packaging or the  sensor is damaged and return them to the vendor     E    CO2 WARM UP    or    CO2 SENSOR START UP    displayed on the screen indicates that    the sensor is in warm up or starting up  After the information disappears from the screen   the standard measurement can then be generated         Monitor has water trap beside it  which is used to prevent the moisture or water drops    produced by patient   s respiration from entering the module  The sample line and the  water trap are one off consumables that can not be repeatedly used by different patients        18 2 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     CO2 Monitoring    18 3 CO2 Menu    18 3 1 Parameter Setup and Adjustment    Turn the knob to select and press CO2 hot key on the screen to activate    CO2 Setup    menu    as shown below     c02 SETUP    ALM ON    AWRR ALM HI 30
104. PM 9000  Portable Multi parameter  Patient Monitor    Operation Manual       Copyright  SHENZHEN MINDRAY BIO MEDICAL ELECTRONICS CO   LTD  2002    Version  V5 4  Issued date  2004 08 08  Serial No  PM 9000    Statement    SHENZHEN MINDRAY BIO MEDICAL ELECTRONICS CO   LTD   hereinafter called Mindray   owns all rights to this unpublished work and intends to maintain this work as confidential   Mindray may also seek to maintain this work as an unpublished copyright  This publication is  to be used solely for the purposes of reference  operation  maintenance  or repair of Mindray  equipment  No part of this can be disseminated for other purposes     In the event of inadvertent or deliberate publication  Mindray intends to enforce its rights to  this work under copyright laws as a published work  Those having access to this work may  not copy  use  or disclose the information in this work unless expressly authorized by Mindray  to do so     All information contained in this publication is believed to be correct  Mindray shall not be  liable for errors contained herein nor for incidental or consequential damages in connection  with the furnishing  performance  or use of this material  This publication may refer to  information and protected by copyrights or patents and does not convey any license under the  patent rights of Mindray  nor the rights of others  Mindray does not assume any liability arising  out of any infringements of patents or other rights of third parties     Cont
105. Pause Silence status  the system will discharge  Pause Silence status automatically  For specific rules  see Chapter Alarm     A Note A    The system will begin to give alarm information again once there exist alarm triggering  event  Nevertheless  remember pushing SILENCE button can permanently shut off  audible alarm sound of ECG LEAD OFF and SPO2 SENSOR OFF alarms          REC STOP Figure 1 3      Press to start a real time recording  The recording time is set in REC TIME of RECORD             SETUP submenu  Press during recording to stop the recording  For detailed information  refer  to related chapter       START Figure 1 30    Press to inflate the cuff to start a blood pressure measurement  When measuring  press to                cancel the measurement and deflate the cuff   e MENU Figure 1 30    Press this button to call up the SYSTEM MENU  in which the user may set up system                information and perform review operation  For detailed information  refer to related chapter   System Menu and related chapter  Trend and Event      Rotary knob  Figure 1 30    The user may use the rotary knob to select the menu item and modify the setup  It can be                rotated clockwise or counter clockwise and pressed like other buttons  The user may use the  knob to realize the operations on the screen and in the system menu and parameter menu     Method to use the knob to operate on the screen     The rectangular mark on the screen that moves with the rotation of the 
106. Procedure    12 3 1 Preparation    1  Prepare the patient s skin prior to placing the electrodes       The skin is a poor conductor of electricity  therefore preparation of the patient s skin  is important to facilitate good electrode contact to skin    WH Shave hair from sites  if necessary    m Wash sites thoroughly with soap and water   Never use ether or pure alcohol   because this increases skin impedance     m Rub the skin briskly to increase capillary blood flow in the tissues and remove skin  scurf and grease    Attach clip or snap to electrodes prior to placement    Put the electrodes on the patient  Before attaching  apply some conductive jelly on the   electrodes if the electrodes are not electrolyte self supplied    Connect the electrode lead to the patient s cable    Make sure the monitor is ready with power supply     A Warning A    Check everyday whether there is skin irritation resulted from the ECG electrodes  If so   replace electrodes every 24 hours or change their sites     A Note A    For protecting environment  the electrodes must be recycled or disposed of properly     A Warning A    Verify lead fault detection prior to the start of monitoring phase  Unplug the ECG cable  from the socket  the screen will display the error message    ECG LEAD OFF    and the  audible alarm is activated        12 2 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     12 3 2 Installing ECG lead    Placing the Electrodes for ECG Monitoring    Electrode placement for 5 lead set  Figure
107. RECALL  The ALARM RECALL window is as shown below  in which following data are displayed    O Time span  Format  month day year hour  minute  month day year hour  minute     O Event type           Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  8 5    Trend and Event    O Serial number  Format  NO  xx of XX     O The value at the time of alarm  NIBP result is with time   O Two 8 16 32 second waveforms     ALARM RECALL    TIME SPAN  12 01 2001 15 04   CURRENT TIME  O       EVENT TYPE ALL       IBP2  mmHg  S   0 SPO2  98  IBP CH1 ART       Page up down to view the previous or the following  alarm event     EXIT    Figure 8 5 ALARM RECALL Menu    To view all waveforms during the alarming process  Pick L RIGHT and turn the knob to view all 8 16 32 second waveforms stored   To view other alarm events    Events of up to 60 are listed chronologically from the latest to the earliest  Pick UP DOWN  button and turn the knob to view later or earlier events     Recording    Pick REC to print our all data and waveform of this event        8 6 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4        Chapter 9 Drug Calculation and  Titration Table    PM 9000 Portable Patient Monitor provides Drug calculation and titration table display  functions for fifteen drugs and outputs the content of titration table on the recorder     9 1 Drug Calculation    The drug calculations that can be performed by the system are AMINOPHYLLINE   DOBUTAMINE  DOPAMINE  EPINEPHRINE  HEPARIN  ISUPREL  LIDOCAINE  NIPRIDE   NITROGLYCE
108. RIN and PITOCIN  Besides DRUG A  DRUG B  DRUG C  DRUG D and DRUG  E are also provided to flexibly replace any of the drugs    Select    DRUG CALC    in SYSTEM MENU  the following    DRUG CALC    display appears     DRUG NAME Drug A   INF RATE 93 75  nl hr  WEIGHT 70 0 4 kg DRIP RATE 31 25   GTT min    AMOUNT 400 00   mg DROP SIZE 20 00   GTTvml    VOLUME 250 00 ml DURATION 2 67   hr  CONCENTRAT 1 60  gt  mg ml    DOSE min 2500 00   mcg Please carefully verify  DOSEVhr 150 00   mg the input information     DOSE kg min 35 71   mcg  DOSE kg hr 2142 86   mcg TITRATION  gt  gt     Patient weight in Kg     EXIT    Figure 9 1 DRUG CALC    The following formulas are applied for dose calculation   Concentrat   Amount   Volume    INF Rate  DOSE Concentrat  Duration   Amount   Dose  Dose   Rate x Concentrat    Operating method   In the Drug Calculation window  the operator should first select the name of the drug to be       Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  9 1    Drug Calculation and Titration Table    calculated  and then confirm the patient weight  Afterwards  the operator should also enter  other known values    Turn the knob to select the value of the item to be calculated  Turn the knob to change the  value  When it is the required value  press the knob to view the calculation result  Each item  has its calculation range  If the result exceeds the range  display              AN Note A    For the drug calculation  the prerequisite is that the operator must first of all enter
109. ROR AG module has communication failure  High   AG HARDWARE ERROR AG module has hardware failure  High   AG DATA LIMIT ERROR AG module failure High   AG USA ERROR AG module failure High   AG ZREF FAIL AG module fails to zero  High   AG CAL FAIL AG module fails to calibrate  High   FiCO2 ALM LMT ERR Functional safety failure High   EtCO2 ALM LMT ERR Functional safety failure High   FiO2 ALM LMT ERR Functional safety failure High     EtO2ALMLMTERR Functional safety failure       Hgh  gt      FINROALMLMTERR Functional safety failure       Hgh       EtN20ALMLMTERR Functional safety failure       Hgh  gt      FIAAALMLMTERR Functional safety failure       High  gt      Et AAALMLMTERR Functional safety failure     High       AWRRALMLMTERR Functional safety failure         High     Prompt   Message Cause Alarm level   AG IS STARTING Loading the AG module No alarm   AG WARM UP E is operating in the Warm up No alarm   AG STANDBY The AG module is operating in the Standby NolArm       Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     19 11    Anesthetic Gas Measurement    19 5 Maintenance and cleaning      AGmodule    For detailed cleaning information about    AG Module     refer to the chapter of     Maintenance and Cleaning    in this operation manual     H Bacteria filter   The bacteria filter is one off type  i e   one bacteria filter can only be used by one patient   m  Sample line   The sample line is one off type   m Gas exhaust outlet    The gas exhaust outlet is reusable  You need to r
110. TREND TABLE    menu when    viewing the trend table to printout the currently displayed       7 4    Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     Arrhythmia review recording    Alarm review recording    NIBP review recording    CO measurement curve record    Hemodynamic Calculation  result recording    Monitor information recording    Titration table recording    OxyCRG recording    A Note AY    Recording    trend table     Access ARR RECALL window from ARR ANALYSIS of ECG  SETUP menu and Pick    WAVE    button to access    ARR  WAVE RECALL    menu  Then press    REC    button to output  the Arr  Waveform and related information currently  displayed on the screen    Access the    ALARM RECALL    window from    ALARM  RECALL CONDITION    menu from    SYSTEM MENU    and  pick    REC    button to print out the alarm review waveform  and related information currently displayed in the    ALARM  RECALL    window     Access the    NIBP RECALL    window from    SYSTEM MENU     and pick    REC    button to print out the NIBP information  currently displayed in the window     Press the MEASURE button on the CO module to call up  the    WINDOWS FOR CO MEASUREMENT    window   Pick    REC    button to print out the CO value and  measurement curve    Access the MEASURE button on the CO module to call up  the    WINDOWS FOR CO MEASUREMENT    window  Pick  the    EDIT    button in the window to call up the    WINDOWS  FOR C O  EDIT    window  in which pick the    HEMO  CALCULATE    button to a
111. afety  Consult the manufacturer of the monitoring equipment for questions relating to  monitor safety       Calibration    The ICT B is supplied with minimal zero offset and the sensitivity is set at 5 uV V mmHg  In  order to set up the amplifier and recorder accurately the controls should be zeroed at ambient  pressure and then a known pressure applied  for instance using the calibration tube  syringe  and manometer  or immersion to a known depth in a water column  The gain of the system is  then set to the required level  The procedure should be repeated to check that the zero  baseline has not changed due to the change in gain     Manometer and syringe to    apply ak nown pressure     Patient Monitor    Use a iml syringe to inflate the balloon for zero  check  Luer fitting must be open to ambient    pressure during normal operation   Calibration tube       Figure 16 10 ICT B calibration  Tightening the collet on calibration tube over the sliding calibration sleeve will seal around the  ICT B catheter  Using the male luer fitting a connection can be made to a reference pressure   such as a syringe and manometer  The output of the transducer and amplifier system can be  reliably and quickly confirmed       Zeroing    H Checking the Zero when the ICT B is in the Epidural Space       Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  16 15    IBP Monitoring    Using a 1ml syringe  inject approximately 0 3cc of air into the female luer connector on the  proximal end of the ICT B  Leave th
112. all  sounds  Push the SILENCE button again  the system can exit the SILENCE status and  restore the PAUSE status and accordingly suspend the alarm as per the previously defined  time duration  Push the SILENCE button for the third time  the system will exit the PAUSE  status and restore the normal alarm status by giving the alarm sound again  When the system  is in the SILENCE status  any new alarm will terminate the SILENCE status and make the  system restore the normal alarm status     AN Note A    When the lag symbol appears indicating the alarm sound is shut off and  accordingly the system will not give alarm sound  Therefore  you must be very careful    in using this function  There are two methods to terminate this status  One is to set the  alarm volume to    ON    in the MAINTAIN menu  The other method is to push the    SILENCE button shortly to make the EJ symbol become 28   push the SILENCE    button again and the system will restore the normal alarm status again  Or you can  push the SILENCE button for longer time to let the system restore the normal alarm  status     m PAUSE   Push the SILENCE button on the panel shortly  the system will shut off all alarm sound and  visual prompt as well as description of physiological alarm  and enter the PAUSE status  The  countdown of PAUSE status is displayed in the Physiological Alarm area  in which area the  x  symbol is also displayed    The time duration of the PAUSE status can be set to 1min  2min or 3min  You can select
113. ameter name in the system such as HR  ST1  ST2  RR  SpO2  IBP  NIBP  etc         CO2 NO WATERTRAP     CO2   watertrap is not    connected correctly     Check the connection of CO2  watertrap        Replace the filter net or CO2           CO2 WATERTRAP CO2 watertrap is clogged air hose  Check if the water in   OCCLUDE  H Get the CO2 watertrap is too  much     CO2 SIGNAL LOW  CO2 signals are poor  Check for leaks in the airway   Check if the airway is  clogged  Check if the  watertrap is too old  After  excluding the above    CO2 SIGNAL TOO LOW    CO2 signals are too poor  problems  replace another    CO2 air hose or watertrap  If it  still cannot work normally   contact the manufacturer for  repair         CO2 BAROMETRIC TOO    LARGE     CO2 modules has failure         CO2 PNEUMATIC LEAK         CO2 SIGNAL NOISY            CO2 SIGNAL  SATURATE     CO2 CALCULATION  ERR         CO2 PUMP FAULT         CO2REVERSE FLOW         CO2 FORWARD FLOW         CO2 MALNUFUNCTION                        CO2 BAROMETRIC  HIGH     CO2 BAROMETRIC  LOW     CO2 WATCHDOG  ERROR     CO2 INT COMM ERR      CO2 SYSTEM ROM  ERR             Contact the manufacturer for  repair           Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  5       System Alarm Prompt          CO2 FLASH CRC ERR             CO2 EXT RAM ERR             CO2 INT RAM ERR             CO2 FLASH CHECK  ERR             CO2 STACK OVER           CO2 SENSOR FAULT         CO2 SENSOR TEMP  HIGH         CO2 SENSOR TEMP  LOW           When the system di
114. ameters  A   gt   by the rightmost item  indicates following page available  And   lt   by the leftmost item indicated previous page  available     To print out the trend data  Pick REC to print out the trend data of current displayed parameter   Mark event    If an event is marked A  B  C  or D  the corresponding event type will display on the axis time  of the trend table     Operation example    To view a NIBP trend table    Pick MENU hot key lower right of the screen to access    SYSTEM MENU       Pick TREND TABLE    Pick L RIGHT and switch to NIBP by turning the knob    Pick the first item from the left and select requested time interval    Pick UP DOWN and turn the knob to view NIBP trend data of different time    For printout of trend table  pick REC to start report printing of all trend data including    NIBP of this time span   m Pick EXIT to return to SYSTEM MENU     8 3 NIBP Recall    PM 9000 can review the latest 400 NIBP measurement data   Pick NIBP RECALL in the SYSTEM MENU to invoke the result and time of the latest 10  measurements  as shown in the figure below     NIBP RECALL  KS HH HD TIHE       12 91 2091 15 13 50    NUM  1 UNIT UP DOUN REC    Select the unit of the NIDP measured result     EXIT    Figure 8 3 NIBP RECALL       8 4 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     Trend and Event    Data is listed chronologically from the latest to the earliest  10 measurements can be  displayed in one screen  Pick UP DOWN to view other trend curve up to 400 result
115. an  60  and Oz is not being monitored  turn on this switch     SWEEP  used to select the speed to scan the screen waveforms     WORK MODE  to monitor the anesthetic gas  select the    MEASURE    option   Otherwise  select the    STANDBY    option     ALARM SETUP gt  gt   used to enter the ALARM SETUP submenu   CALIBRATE gt  gt   used to enter the CALIBRATE submenu   O2 calibrate gt  gt   used to enter the    O2 CALIBRATE    submenu     ADJUST WAVE AMP gt  gt   used to enter the    ADJUST WAVE AMP    submenu  in  which you may select the appropriate waveform amplitude for display     DEFAULT gt   gt   used to enter the    AG DEFAULT CONFIG    submenu  You can use  the information in this submenu to initialize all menus        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     Anesthetic Gas Measurement    19  3 2 ALARM SETUP menu  In the ALARM SETUP menu  select the    ALARM    item to pop up the    ALARM SETUP    menu     ALARM SETUP    ALM ON v EZ ALM HI 684    ALM LEV MED   EZ ALM LO 76    ALM REC OFF   Fi02 ALM HI 669    EtcO2 ALM HI bp   Fi02 ALM LO 7    EtcO2 ALM LO 15   AWRR ALM HI 30    FicO2 ALM HI 4   AURR ALN LO 8 Ka    FicO2 ALM LO o  gt  OTHER SETUP  gt  gt     Back to the upper menu     DT    Figure 19 4 ALARM SETUP menu    ALM  when this switch is    ON     if anesthetic gas has alarm  the system will give  alarm prompt and save the alarm information  When this switch is    OFF     the  system will not trigger alarm  Instead it will display    beside GAS in the  Paramet
116. and output content   Turn knob to select the MENU hot key on the lower right part of the screen to call up the     SYSTEM MENU    menu  You can perform following operations in this menu     SYSTEM MENU    PATIENT SETUP  gt  gt  SYSTEM SETUP  gt  gt     DEFAULT  gt  gt  SELECTION  gt  gt   TREND GRAPH  gt  gt  VERSION  gt  gt   TREND TABLE  gt  gt  DRUG CALC  gt  gt   NIBP RECALL  gt  gt  MAINTAIN  gt  gt     ALARM RECALL  gt  gt  DEMO  gt  gt     Provide the DEMO data and display the  DEMO waveform     EXIT    Figure 3 1 SYSTEM MENU    Trend graph table review  NIBP review and alarm review are discussed in Chapter  Trend and  Event     3 1 Patient Information Setup    AN Note A    To clear current patient data  refer to New Patient for details     Pick the  PATIENT SETUP  item in the    SYSTEM MENU    to call up the following menu     Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  3 1    System Menu    PATIENT SETUP    DEPT  ADMIT 20014 8 e 104  PAT NO 888 BIRTH 19514 8 e 104  BED NO 3   HEIGHT 175 0   cm    DOCTOR CHEN WEIGHT 70 0 om    NAME   zg BLOOD A  lt   SEX M   NEW PATIENT  PAT TYPE ADU      ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTU  VUXxYZ0123456789 DEL OK    Enter max  12 characters  DEL  delete the current       character  OK  confirm the entered information     EXIT    Figure 3 2 PATIENT SETUP    You can setup following patient information     DEPT   PAT NO  BED NO  DOCTOR    NAME    SEX   PAT TYPE  ADMIT  BIRTH    HT   cm inch      WT   kg lb     BLOOD    NEW PATIENT    Department in which
117. ange of wavelengths mentioned above  oxygen does not absorb infrared rays   Therefore we have to measure oxygen concentration by taking advantage of its paramagnetic  characteristic  Inside the sensor of the oxygen module  there are two glass balls filled up with       19 2 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     Anesthetic Gas Measurement    Nitrogen  These two glass balls are suspended into symmetric non uniform magnetic field   pointing into the direction away from the most intensive part of the field  This device is  surrounded by oxygen having paramagnetic characteristic  By this means  this device is  actually further pushed out of the field by the oxygen having relatively more intensive  paramagnetic characteristic  The force moment acted on this device is proportional to the  paramagnetic intensity of the surrounding gas  and therefore also proportional to oxygen  concentration     t         AG Mondule  Patient monitor    A       Exhaust line to  Scavenging System    Patient sample line eg    Airway Adapter          e Endotracheal Tube    Figure 19 2 connection diagram for measuring AG gas    A warningA     Ensure tight connection when installing the filter  Any leakage in the system will result  in incorrect reading because this leakage will make the surrounding environmental air  mix up with patient gas     A warningA     To protect the module against contamination  always use bacteria filter because  without it  bacteria and liquid may directly enter the AG modu
118. ates transportation of patient  Large  high resolution display provides clear view of 8 waveforms and full monitoring parameters   The POWER switch is on the bottom left quarter of the front panel  IT in Figure 1 1   It lights  when the device is on  The CHARGE indicator     in Figure 1 1  is on the right side of the  POWER switch  It is used to indicate the AC Mains condition   The ALARM indicator is on the  upper side of the front panel  The ALARM indicator flashes or lights when alarm occurs  Q in  Figure 1 1   The sockets of the sensors are at the left side  The recorder socket is at the right  side  Other sockets and power plug in are at the rear panel     PM 9000 is a user friendly device with operations conducted by a few buttons on the front  panel  TI in Figure 1 1  and a rotary knob  Il in Figure 1 1   Refer to 1 3 Button Functions  for details        Figure 1 1 PM 9000 Portable Patient Monitor    The visible LEDs are CLASS 1 LED PRODUCT according with EN 60825 1 A11 Oct 1996   PM 9000 Portable Patient Monitor performs monitoring of        ECG Heart Rate  HR   2 channel ECG waveforms  Arrhythmia and S T segment analysis   optional                                RESP Respiratory Rate  RR   Respiration Waveform   SpO2 Oxygen Saturation  SpO2   Pulse Rate  PR   SpO2 Plethysmogram   NIBP Systolic Pressure  NS   Diastolic Pressure  ND   Mean Pressure   NM    TEMP Channel 1 Temperature  T1   Channel 2 Temperature  T2    Temperature Difference between two channels  TD    I
119. ations  At least every 3 months  it should be checked by a qualified customer  service technician     All the checks that need to open the monitor should be performed by qualified customer  service technician  The safety and maintenance check can be conducted by persons from  Mindray  You can obtain the material about the customer service contract from the local  Mindray office     A Warning A   If the hospital or agency that is responding to using the monitor does not follow a  satisfactory maintenance schedule  the monitor may become invalid  and the human  health may be endangered     A Note A    To ensure maximum battery life  it is recommended that  at least once a month  the  monitor be run on battery until it turns itself off and then recharged     A Warning A    Refer the battery replacement only to Mindray service technician        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  11 1    Care   Cleaning    11 2 General Cleaning    A Warning A  Before cleaning the monitor or the sensor  make sure that the equipment is switched  off and disconnected from the power line     The PM 9000 Patient Monitor must be kept dust free     Regular cleaning of the monitor shell and the screen is strongly recommended  Use only  non caustic detergents such as soap and water to clean the monitor shell     A Note A    Please pay special attention to the following items    1  Avoid using ammonia based or acetone based cleaners such as acetone    2  Most cleaning agents must be diluted before use 
120. ations in the system will be replaced by    default configurations      3 3 Trend Review  Measurement Review and Alarm  Event Review    In the    SYSTEM MENU     there are  TREND GRAPH    TREND TABLE    NIBP RECALL  and   ALARM RECALL  items  Please refer to Chapter 7  Trend and Event for detailed information     3 4 System Setup    Select the  system setup  item in the  system menu         3 4 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     System Menu    SYSTEM SETUP    FACE SELECT  gt  gt  ANALOG  gt  gt    ALARM SETUP  gt  gt  MODULE SETUP  gt  gt    TIME SETUP  gt  gt  TRACE SETUP  gt  gt   RECORD  gt  gt  MARK EVENT  gt  gt     Back to the upper menu     EE    Figure 3 6 System setup  In the  System setup  menu   users can setup the following items     3 4 1 Face select    Select    FACE SELECT    item in    SYSTEM SETUP    menu to access    FACE SELECT    dialog  box as shown below  in which four selections are available  STANDARD SCREEN  TREND  SCREEN  oxyCRG SCREEN and VIEWBED SCREEN  Only one selection can be chosen for  each time     FACE SELECT        STANDARD SCREEN  TREND SCREEN  oxyCRG SCREEN  VIEWBED SCREEN    Conventional monitor  screen     EXIT  Figure 3 7 FACE SELECT    3 4 2 Alarm setup    The system provides three levels of alarm volume  You can select any of them as per the  clinical requirement  The procedures are     Select the  ALARM SETUP  item in the    SYSTEM SETUP    sub menu of the    SYSTEM  SETUP    menu  The menu as shown below will pop up  in whi
121. ature cable of  T1 SENSOR OFF channel 1 may be LOW Make sure that the cable is  disconnected from the properly connected   monitor   Temperature cable of channel  T2 SENSOR OFF 2 may be disconnected from LOW Make sure that the cable is  the monitor  properly connected           Stop using alarming   T1 ALMLMT ERR Functional safety failure HIGH function of TEMP module   notify biomedical engineer  or Mindray service staff        Stop using alarming   T2ALMLMT ERR Functional safety failure HIGH function of TEMP module   notify biomedical engineer  or Mindray service staff        Stop using alarming   TD ALM LMT ERR Functional safety failure HIGH function of TEMP module   notify biomedical engineer  or Mindray service staff           Prompt message     Message Cause Alarm Level    Measuring value of channel 1 is  beyond measuring range   Measuring value of channel 2 is  beyond measuring range     T1 EXCEED HIGH       T2 EXCEED HIGH          Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  15 3    TEMP Monitoring  15 4 Care and Cleaning    AN Warning AN    Before cleaning the monitor or the probe  make sure that the equipment is switched off  and disconnected from the power line     Reusable TEMP Probes   1 The TEMP probe should not be heated above 100  C  212  F   It should only be  subjected briefly to temperatures between 80  C  176  F  and 100  C  212  F     2 The probe must not be sterilized in steam    3 Only detergents containing no alcohol can be used for disaffection    4 The rec
122. ay a    amp  beside     SpO        m ALM REC  pick  ON   the system will command the recorder to output alarm information  when SpO  alarm occurs    m ALM LEV  used to set up alarm level  selectable from HIGH  MED and LOW  HIGH  represents the most serious case    mM SPO2 ALM HI and SPO2 ALM LO  SpOz alarm is activated when the result exceeds set  SPO2 ALM HI value or falls below SPO2 ALM LO value    m PR ALM HI and PR ALM LO  PR alarm is activated when the pulse rate exceeds set PR  ALM HI value or falls below PR ALM LO value     SpO2 and PR alarm limits           Max  Upper Limit Min  Lower Limit Step  SpO2 100 0 1  PR 254 0 1  The default SpO2 and PR alarm limits   Parameters Max  Upper Limit Min  Lower Limit  SpO2 Adult 100 90  Pediatric 100 90          Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  13 19    SpO2 Monitoring                   Neonatal 95 85  Adult 120 50  PR Pediatric 160 75  Neonatal 200 100  m SWEEP  Available options are 12 5mm s  25 0 mm s   m PRSOUND    Pulse beep volume  The options are from    3    to    0        3    indicates the maximum volume  while    0    the minimum    m AVG TIME  4S  8S  16S represent times that SpO  average value is counted    m DEFAULT   Pick this item to access the SpoO2 DEFAULT CONFIG dialog box  in which the user may  select whether the FACTORY DEFAULT CONFIG or the USER DEFAULT CONFIG is to  be used  After selecting any of the items and exiting the dialog box  the system will pop  up the dialog box asking for the user   s con
123. can not be measured within specific time HIGH    Technical alarms     Message Cause Alarm Level Remedy    Stop using RESP  alarming function    HIGH notify biomedical  engineer or Mindray  service staff     RESP ALM LMT Functional safety  ERR failure    Prompt message  general alerts    Message Cause Alarm Level    RR measuring value exceeds HIGH    RR EXCEED  the measure range        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  12 23    ECG RESP Monitoring    12 10 Maintenance and Cleaning    Care    A    and Cleaning    Warning A    Before cleaning the monitor or the sensor  make sure that the equipment is switched    off a    nd disconnected from the power line     If there is any sign that the ECG cable may be damaged or deteriorated  replace it with a new    one i    nstead of continuing its application on the patient        mM Cleaning   Use fine hair cloth moistened in mild soap liquid or cleaning agent containing 70   ethanol to clean the equipment       Sterilization  To avoid extended damage to the equipment  sterilization is only recommended when  stipulated as necessary in the Hospital Maintenance Schedule  Sterilization facilities  should be cleaned first   Recommended sterilization material   e   Ethylate  70  alcohol  70  isopropanol  e  Acetaldehyde      Disinfection  To avoid extended damage to the equipment  disinfection is only recommended when  stipulated as necessary in the Hospital Maintenance Schedule  Disinfection facilities  should be cleaned first    12 2
124. categories  which are physiological alarm  technical alarm and  general alarm  Physiological alarm refer to those alarms triggered by patient   s physiological  situation which could be considered dangerous to his or her life  such as heart rate  HR   exceeding alarm limit  parameter alarms   Technical alarm refer to system failure which can  make certain monitoring process technically impossible or make monitoring result  unbelievable  Technical alarm is also called System Error Message  General alarm belongs to  those situations that can not be categorized into these two cases but still need to pay some  attention    PM 9000 has preset the alarm level for the parameters  You can also modify the alarm level  using the method described in this chapter    Alarm level of the System Error Message  technical alarm  is pre set in the system    All technical alarm level and general alarm level  some of the physiological alarm level are  pre set in the system and can not be changed by user        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  5 1    Alarm    5 1 2 Alarm Modes    When alarm occurs  PM 9000 may raise the user   s attention in at least three ways  which are  audio prompt  visual prompt and description Audio and visual prompt is given by TFT display  device  the speaker on the display device and the alarm indicator  Description is displayed on  the screen  Physiological alarm is displayed in the Physiological Alarm area  Most of technical  alarms are displayed in the Technical
125. ccess the    HEMOD WINDOW     window  Then pick the    REC    button to print out the  calculated result    Access the    ENTER MAINTAIN PASSWORD    menu from  the    MAINTAIN    menu  Then pick the    STATUS    button to  access the    STATUS    window  Pick    REC    button to print  out the status monitor information currently displayed in the  window     Access the    DRUG CALC    menu from the    SYSTEM  MENU    menu  Pick the    TITRATION    button in the menu to  access the    TITRATION    window  Pick the    REC    button to  print out the titration currently displayed in the window     In oxyCRG screen  pick the    REC    button to print out  oxyCRG currently displayed in the window     You can press REC STOP button on the recorder to stop the current recording process     Access the    RECORD    menu from the    SYSTEM SETUP    menu  Then pick the    CLEAR REC  TASK    button to stop all recording tasks     7 4 Recorder Operations and Status Messages    Record Paper Requirement    Only standard 50   0  1  mm thermosensitive record paper can be used  otherwise the    recorder may not function  the recording quality may be poor  and the thermosensitive       Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  7 5    Recording    printhead may be damaged   Function Properly    m When the recorder is working  the record paper goes out steadily  Do not pull the paper   or the recorder will be damaged   RW Do not operate the recorder without record paper     Paper Out    When  RECORD
126. cement and move it when the skin deteriorates  More frequent examinations  may be required for different patients     AN Note A    Do not perform SpO  measuring and NIBP measuring in same arm at one time  because  obstruction of blood flow during NIBP measuring may adversely affect the reading of  SpO  value     A Note A      Make sure the nail covers the light window     The wire should be on the backside of the hand     AN Note A    SpO  value always displays at the same position  Pulse Rate will display when HR  FROM is set at  SpO2      BOTH    in the ECG SETUP menu     A Note A    SpO  waveform is not proportional to the pulse volume     13 1 2 Monitoring Procedure    AN Note A    This monitor with MS 7 is intended for continuous noninvasive monitoring of  functional oxygen saturation of arterial hemoglobin  SpO2  and pulse rate  measured  by an SpO2 sensor  for adult  pediatric  and neonatal patients in a hospital and mobile  environment     Limitations for Measurement    If the accuracy of any measurement does not seem reasonable  first check the patient   s vital  signs by alternate means and the check the instrument for proper functioning   Inaccurate measurements may be caused by       incorrect sensor application or use       Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  13 5    SpO2 Monitoring    significant levels of dysfunctional hemoglobins  e g   carboxyhemoglobin or  methemoglobin    intravascular dyes such as indocyanine green or methylene blue    exposure to exce
127. ch you can set up the alarm  volume and other alarm information  For detailed information  refer to Chapter Alarm        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  3 5    System Menu    ALARM SETUP  ALM SEL  COMMON ALM SETUP       ALARM VOL 5 x  ALM REC TIME 8S x  ALM PAUSE TIME 11MIN x  PARA ALM TYPE UNLATCH      Back to the upper menu     Figure 3 8 Alarm Setup  Pick    ALARM VOL    item  turn the knob to set the volume  The options are from    10    to    1         10    indicates the maximum volume while    1    the minimum        3 4 3 Time Setup    Select the  TIME SETUP  item in the    SYSTEM SETUP    menu  The menu as shown below  will pop up  System time is in the format of year  month  day  hour  minute and second  Use  cursor to highlight the item that you want to modify and turn the knob to select time  Then  select  EXIT      A Note A    You shall set up the system time upon turning on the monitor  if you need to set up the  system time   otherwise  when you review the content with time information  the  system may not display the correct time     wan Ter a    MONTH 12 Ka  DAY 1 Ka  HOUR 15 Ka  MINUTE 58 Ka    SECOND 17 Ka    Set the system time     EXIT    Figure 3 9 System Time Setup  When this monitor is linked to the Central Station  its system time will keep consistent with  that of the Central Station  Method to adjust time Once link is successfully established  the  Central Station will send its current time to the monitor  The monitor will automatically adju
128. cording  Auto 8 second recording    Parameter alarm recording       Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     2 7 Recall   Trend Recall  Short  Long    Alarm Event Recall    NIBP Measurement Recall    2 8 ECG    Lead Mode  Lead selection  Waveform  Lead mode  Lead selection  Waveform  Gain  HR and Alarm  Range  Adult  Neo Ped  Accuracy  Resolution  Sensitivity  Differential Input Impedance  CMRR  Monitor  Surgery  Diagnostic  Electrode offset potential  Leakage Current    Production Specification    Waveform freeze recording   Trend graph table recording   ARR events review recording   Alarm event review recording   NIBP review recording   CO  Measurement review recording   AG Measurement review recording   CO Measurement curve recording  Hemodynamic Calculation result recording  Drug Calculation and titration table recording  Monitor information recording   OxyCRG review recording    1 hour  1 second or 5 second Resolution   72  hrs   1 min  5min or 10 min Resolution   60 alarm events of all parameters and 8 16 or 32  seconds of corresponding waveform    400 NIBP measurement data     5 Leads  R  L  F  N  C or RA  LA  LL  RL  V    I  Il  III  avR  avL  avF  V  CAL    2 ch   3 Leads   R  L  F or RA  LA  LL   1  Ul  Ul  CAL   1 ch    x0 25  x0 5  x1  x2  auto    15   300  bpm    15   350  bpm      1  or   1bpm  use the greater  1  bpm     gt  200  uV  P P    gt  5  Mohm      gt  105 dB   gt  105 dB   gt  90 dB    300mV   lt  10  uA        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4
129. d exit the menu     A Note A  If you select  YES   the system will delete all information of the patient being currently  monitored     3 2 Default Setup    AN Note A    After selecting any item in this sub menu  the selected item will replace the current  setup of the system and accordingly become the system default configuration     DEFAULT    FACTORY DEFAULT ADU CONFIG  FACTORY DEFAULT PED CONFIG  FACTORY DEFAULT NEO CONFIG  USER DEFAULT ADU CONFIG  USER DEFAULT PED CONFIG  USER DEFAULT NEO CONFIG  SAVE CURRENT AS USER CONFIG    Back to the upper menu     Figure 3 4 DEFAULT Menu       Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  3 3    System Menu    In this sub menu  you can select both the factory default and the user defined default  Also in  this sub menu  you can save the current system configuration as the user defined default  configuration  But at this time  the system will automatically save all the setups in the  parameter menu  ECG gain and filter way as the user defined default configuration according  to the patient type  Also  the dialog box as shown below will pop up     CONFIRM SAVE DEFAULT CONFIG    Old user defined config  for this    patient type will covered  Yes     Figure 3 5 CONFIRM DEFAULT CONFIG    AN Note A    After selecting any item in the DEFAULT menu and exiting the box  the    CONFIRM  DEFAULT CONFIG    Dialog box will pop up  in which you can select  YES  to confirm  your selection or  NO  to give up your selection     A warning      All configur
130. e  INTERFERENCE preventing reading  LOW Remove outside interference   If values are not displayed  within 30 seconds  disconnect  SpO2 PULSE Unit is searching for the LOW and reconnect sensor  If pulse  SEARCH patients pulse  search continues  remove  sensor and replace on a better  perfused site   SpO2 LOW Move sensor to better  PERFUSION signal tog smal  OW perfused site   Too much light on  SpO2 TOO FE Remove or reduce lighting   Inadequate tissue LOW Ges sensor from light   MUCH LIGHT detector   SpO2 LOW l l Ensure   proper sensor  Low signal quality  LOW application  Mover sensor to a  SIGNAL IQ better perfused site      Stop using the measuring  spe Get ee Meda a eH EE EE module   BOARD FAULT board malt  netions notify biomedical engineer or     our service staff    This message is   displayed when the front  SpO2 end module is having Se Os ae  COMMUNICATION   problems communicating   HIGH       SE notify biomedical engineer or   ERROR   ie  framing errors or bad GT EE   checksums  with the     Masimo board    This message is  SpO02 displayed when the host oe Soe edie  COMMUNICATION   can not receive the data   HIGH      STOP       from Masimo board for 5  seconds          notify biomedical engineer or  our service staff           13 12    Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4        SpO   Monitoring       This message is Stop using the measuring  displayed when the SpO2 function of SpO2 module    SES ren module initialization error GC notify biomedical engineer or  ha
131. e ECG is 5 lead  the selectable leads are     Il  III  aVR  aVL  aVF  V  when    ECG is 3 lead  the selectable leads are  II Ill   30 Leads on the ECG wave must not have the same name  Otherwise  the system will       Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     ECG RESP Monitoring    automatically change the ECG waveform name that has the same name as the waveform  being currently adjusted to another name    Waveform gain of channel 1  used to adjust the size of ECG waveforms   Select gain value for each channel from x 0 25 x 0 5 x 1 x 2  and auto  Under  auto   mode  the monitor chooses an appropriate level automatically  A 1mv scale displays on  each ECG channel s right side  The height of 1mV bar is directly proportional to the  waveform amplitude     A Note A    When the input signals are too large  the peak of the waveform may be not able to be  displayed  In this case the user may manually change the setup method of ECG  waveform according to the actual waveform so as to avoid the occurrence of the  unfavorable phenomena                          Filter method  used for displaying clearer and more detailed waveform   There are three filter modes for selection  DIAGNOSTI  MONITOR and SURGERY  modes may reduce perturbance and interference from Electrosurgery equipment  The  filter method is the item applicable for both channels  which is always displayed at the  waveform place of the channel 1 ECG waveform        A Note A    Only in Diagnosis mode  the system can provide no
132. e QRS complex  RR t  BRADY   Al patients interval is longer than 1 5s  User selectable  When HR is less than 100 beats min    no heart beat is tested during the  MISSED Without period 1 75 times of the average RR User selectable  BEATS pacemaker interval  or  When HR is larger than 100 beats min    no beat is tested with 1 second   No QRS complex and pacing pulse are  PNP With availabe during the period 1 75 times User selectable  pacemaker of the average R R interval  only  considering patients with pacemaker    When pacing pulse is available  no  With QRS exists during the period 1 75 times y  SR pacemaker of the average RR interval  only Userscleelable  considering patients with pacemaker    Patient type     All patients  refers to perform Arr analysis on patients either with pacemakers or without    pacemakers     Without pacemaker  refers to perform Arr  Analysis only on the patients without pacemakers     With pacemaker  refers to perform Arr  Analysis only on the patients with pacemakers     Prompt message     Message    ARR LEARNING    A Note A    Arrhythmia name displays in the Alarm Message Area     Cause    The QRS template building  required for Arr  Analysis is in  process     12 9 Measuring RESP    12 9 1 How to measure RESP     The monitor measures respiration from the amount of thoracic impedance between two ECG    Alarm Level    No alarm    electrodes  The change of impedance between the two electrodes   due to the thoracic    movement   produces a respirator
133. e as the cursor  moves here     To print out the trend curve  Press REC button to print out the trend curve of current selected parameter   Mark event    If an event is marked A  B  C  or D  then the corresponding event type will display on the axis  time of the trend graph  The event sign  A  B  C or D  is displayed in a frame     Operation example    To view the NIBP trend graph of the last 1 hour   m Pick the MENU hot key lower right of the screen   Pick TREND GRAPH item   Pick the first item and switch to NIBP by turning the knob   Adjust the second item to be 1 or 5 sec     Pick the ZOOM button and turn the knob to view changes of the trend graph time   and trend curve    E Stop at requested trend time section for careful review  Pick the ZOOM button to  adjust the display scale if necessary    E For measurement result of a specific time  pick CURSOR to move the cursor to the  point  corresponding time and value will display on above and below respectively    E For printout of trend graph  pick REC to start report printing of NIBP trend of this  hour    H Pick EXIT to return to trend graph display        8 2 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     Trend and Event    8 2 Trend Table    H The latest 72 trend table data can be displayed at every 1  5  10  30  or 60 minutes   Pick TREND TABLE in the SYSTEM MENU to call up the following menu     TREND TABLE    HR RR PUC  gt   TIHE EVENT  BPH   RPM    min      01 15 48 59 20       01 15 47 6 20       01315  46 6 2       01 
134. e in combination with air  oxygen enriched environments  or  nitrous oxide     A Warning A  You must verify if the device and accessories can function safely and normally before  use     A Warning A  You must customize the alarm setups according to individual patient situation and  make sure that alarm sound can be activated when alarm occurs     A Warning A  Do not use cellular phone in the vicinity of this device  High level electromagnetic  radiation emitted from such devices may greatly affect the monitor performance        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  1 1    Introduction    AN Warning A    Do not touch the patient  table  or the device during defibrillation     A Warning A    Devices connected to the monitor shall form an equipotential system  protectively  earthed      A Warning A  When used with Electro surgery equipment  you  doctor or nurse  must give top  priority to the patient safety     A Warning A   Do not place the monitor or external power supply in any position that might cause it  to fall on the patient  Do not lift the monitor by the power supply cord or patient cable   use only the handle on the monitor     A Warning A   Consult IEC 601 1 1 for system interconnection guidance  The specific requirements  for system interconnection are dependent upon the device connected to the monitor  and the relative locations of each device from the patient  and the relative location of  the connected device to the medically used room containing the monitor  I
135. e syringe attached and note the value on the pressure  monitor or scope  The ICP will decrease to zero or a value very close to it  If the  monitor transducer combination has drifted from zero  reset the zero control to zero value on  the meter  Remove the syringe and the monitor will immediately begin to measure intracranial  pressure     A Warning A    The total volume of air injected from a 1ml syringe to check the zero must not exceed  0 5ml or the membrane over the sensor may be ruptured     H Connecting to a new monitor when the ICT B is in the Epidural Space    v Set correct pressure range on monitor    Inject 0 3cc of air from a 1ml syringe    Adjust the monitor for zero reading    With the air still injected  set the calibration number on the monitor  if applicable     2 SS S    Remove the syringe and the ICP will be displayed immediately     A Note A  Always leave the luer fitting open to ambient pressure during measurement   AY Warning A    Disconnect the catheter from the monitor before defibrillation or electrosurgery   16 7 4 Practicing with the ICT B    It is a good idea to obtain experience using the ICT B and monitor combination before actually  using the device with a patient     Set up the monitor and the ICT B as already described  Use either a water column or the  calibration tube to apply a known pressure of from 10 to 25mmHg to the ICT B  Recall that  13 6cm of water is about equal to 10mmHg     With the known pressure applied to the ICT B  inject appro
136. e top part of the screen  displaying the current status of both the  monitor and the patient      Patient information include     BED NO Bed numbers of all patients under monitoring  Patient type Three options  Adult  Pediatric  Neonate     01 01 2000    Current date      130 510 32    Current date and time       Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  1 5    Introduction    Male Patient sex  Male or Female  ZHANG SHAN Patient name This item will display blank if the operator does not  input patient name   Other information in the Message Area will appear and disappear together with the reported  status  According to the content  the information is divided into   E Prompt information  reporting the current status of the monitor or sensor probe  which  always appears to the right of the system time  When this information appears  it will cover  patient sex and name     E EI flag for alarm PAUSE  Press    SILENCE    button once  less than 1 second  to mute all    alarm sounds are muted for the time being and the flag appears at the same time  Press the  button again to terminate the PAUSE status  The duration for PAUSE status can be 1 minute   2 minutes or 3 minutes       EZ flag for alarm SILENCE  Press    SILENCE    button once  more than 1 second  to    manually mute the alarm sound and this flag appears at the same time  The SILENCE status  terminates when you discharge the status or new alarm occurs       lag flag for Alarm Volume Off  It appears indicating that you have c
137. eclaration of Conformance         sss ssssssunseunseunnnunnnunnnnunnnunnnunnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn enn    Appendix ll Product Specification             ccccseccseeeecesneeeeeeseseeeenseeeeseeeseseaeseseeeeeeeeeseeeseseeeeenseaes    Appendix IIl EMC    Appendix IV System Alarm Prompt           scccseeeseeeeeeeeeseneeeseeeeneeeeeseaeeesaesnseeeeeeeeeseeseseneeenseees       Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4        Chapter 1 Introduction    For an overall introduction to the monitor  please refer to General Information   For various messages displayed on the screen  please refer to Screen Display   For basic operating instructions  please refer to Button Function    For allocation of interface sockets  please refer to Interfaces     For important facts to be noted during the battery recharging procedure  please refer to  Built in Battery   m For safety precautions of the monitor  please refer to Patient Safety     A Warning A  PM 9000 Portable Multi Parameter Patient Monitor is intended for clinical monitoring  application with operation only granted to appropriate medical staff     A Warning AN    Monitor can only monitoring one patient at a time     AN Warning A   There could be hazard of electrical shock by opening the monitor casing  All servicing  and future upgrading to this equipment must be carried out by personnel trained and  authorized by Mindray     A Warning A   Possible explosion hazard if used in the presence of flammable anesthetics or other  flammable substanc
138. ection  Select  EXIT  to exit the    menu and consequently the selection will come into effect     Event function has following significance     To classify the records into different categories  such as those having influence on patients    and those having influence on parameter monitoring including dose taking  injection  therapy    status  Event will be displayed on the trend graph table in order to assist the analysis on the    patient parameters when the event happens        3 10 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     System Menu    3 5 Selection Setup    Select the  SELECTION  item in the    SYSTEM SETUP    to call up the following menu     SELECTION    KEY voL f5     HELP ON M  SCAN TYPE REFRESH    ALM LIMIT OFF M    Select the appropriate key  volume     EXIT    Figure 3 16 Selection Setup  Key Volume   Pick    KEY VOL    item in    SELECTION    menu  turn the knob to set the volume  The options are  from    3    to    0        3    indicates the maximum volume while    0    the minimum     Help Function    The system provides On line Help to menu operations  You can choose any help information  as per your need  The method is    Select the  SELECTION  item in the    SYSTEM MENU    to access the    SELECTION     sub menu  in which you can highlight the  HELP  item and turn the knob to select    ON    or     OFF     When it is    ON     you can browse the on line help information  When it is    OFF     the  system will turn off the on line help function     Scan t
139. ed  An example of a steady state measurement is  measuring the CO2 content inside an incubator  Calibration procedures use calibrated  gas which is free of water vapor or dry as well   The water vapor compensation is ON by default and may be enabled or disabled via a  host system command              H BTPS  The end user may want choose whether to correct values for gas that is at body  temperature  ambient pressure and is saturated with water vapor  BTPS  or has that is at  ambient temperature and pressure and is dry  ATPD   BTPS compensation  Body  Temperature and Pressure  Saturated  is a user selectable compensation that accounts  for the differences between the airway sample and    deep lung    CO2  Since the intent is to          Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  18 5    CO2 Monitoring    report    deep lung    CO2  where the sample is at 37  C and fully saturated  BTPS  compensates for the variance of water vapor content due to temperature  The BTPS  compensation of CO2 module is on by default     A Note A  1     If Compensate item is not correctly set as per the operation conditions  the result  will be far from the actual value  thus leading to severe misdiagnosis    2  The default of Water Vapor Compensate is on  Turn it off when measuring dry gas   such as when performing regular maintenance or measurement validation by using  dry calibrated gas    3  The default of BTPS is on  Turn it on when measuring the VA saturated    damp    gas  under the body temperat
140. eds the alarm limits  an alarm will occur   IBP alarm limits     Pressure Label sig ee EN Es ow e  ART 300 0 1  PA 120  6 1  CVP 40  10 1  RAP 40  10 1  LAP 40  10 1  ICP 40  10 1  P1 300  50 1  P2 300  50 1    IBP Zeroing    Press the IBP PRESSURE ZERO button on the IBP SELECT menu to call up IBP  PRESSURE ZERO menu as shown below     IBP PRESSURE ZERO    Being Prepared  press ZERO key   CH1 ZERO 00 00 0000 00 00 00    CH2 ZERO 00 00 0000 00 00 00    Back to the upper menu     Figure 16 5 IBP PRESSURE ZERO    A Note A    User should ensure that the transducer has been zeroed before measurement        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  16 5    IBP Monitoring    otherwise the device does not have valid zero value  which may result in  inaccurate measuring data     Zero Transducer  Select    CH1 ZERO     IBP1 is zeroed  Select    CH2 ZERO     IBP2 is zeroed  Cautions   H Close the transducer stopcock to the patient before zeroing   WR Open the venting stopcock to atmosphere   m The transducer should be placed at the same level of the patient   s heart  approximately  mid axillary line   H Zero procedure should be performed before starting the monitoring or at least once a day   or each time after connecting disconnecting the cable    Information related to zero   For this example  CH1 is used   m    SUCCESSFUL ZERO     Indicate the zero procedure has finished  open the transducer stopcock to the patient  and close the venting stopcock to atmosphere   m    SENSOR OFF  FAIL 
141. efore  if select    RR      the position displays the dynamic trend of RR  If select    RESP WAVE     the position  displays the compressed Resp  Wave     H Record    Select the    REC    hot key in the    OxyCRG Screen     you may use the recorder to output  the three waveforms in the oxyCRG at the same time     H Close OxyCRG    In the FACE SELECT menu  select options of other operating screens to close the  OxyCRG Screen        4 5 Viewbed Screen  If another monitor is connected on the same LAN of this monitor  you can use this  monitor to view any measured waveform and information about all measured  parameters from another monitor   m Enter Viewbed Screen  Select the    VIEWBED SCREEN    option in the    FACE SELECT    menu  Viewbed  Screen window occupies the space of the bottom four waveforms    4 4 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     Face Select    BED No  1 ADU ee     Zhang shan M    VIEWBED    NIBP mmHg  uS wo    WACNOSTIC       Figure 4 5 VIEWBED SCREEN  H Hot key of Viewbed    There are two hot keys in the Viewbed Screen  Select Bed Number and Select  Waveform     The hot key of Select Bed Number displays the bed numbers and patient names of  other monitors currently connected on the LAN  You can select a monitor to be  monitored according to the patient name and bed number  If at this time no other  monitors are connected on the same LAN of this monitor  the hot key of Bed Number  will therefore display    N A     After you use this hot key to select a mon
142. elow  There are four options in  this dialog  which are    STANDARD SCREEN        TREND SCREEN        oxyCRG  SCREEN    and    VIEWBED SCREEN     Only one item can be selected at one time     FACE SELECT    Conventional monitor  screen     Figure 4 1 FACE SELECT    4 2 Standard Screen    In the    FACE SELECT    menu  Select the    STANDARD SCREEN    option to enter the  Standard Screen  The Standard Screen displays to us the parameters in the Parameter  area and the waveforms being monitored  This screen is the basic operating screen of  the monitor        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  4 1    Face Select    BED No 1 ADU Z  nn   Zhang shan M ek   HR TOO HIGH    DUACNOSTIC G POCE OF    STI 000  1 00 die A  rics O0    DI 21 08      EEN wn    98  x       Figure 4 2 STANDARD SCREEN    4 3 Trend Screen    H Enter TREND SCREEN  In the    FACE SELECT    menu  select the    TREND SCREEN    option to enter the Trend    Screen     BED No  1 ADU crorzmo    Zhang shan M   HR TOO HIGH    60 PWs OFF x    NIBP 24 08    108   70    DIAGNOSTIC    98       Figure 4 3 TREND SCREEN    H Position of trend graph       4 2 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     4 4    Face Select    Trend graph is located to the right of the corresponding waveform in the Waveform  area  Its color is the same as that of the corresponding parameter     H Trend length    Dynamic trend length is 2 hours  On the trend graph  the scale of the right end of the  X axis is 0 hour while the left end is 2 hour  
143. emaining part is displayed as a  straight line  Use the rotary snob on the front panel to move the cursor to the    RECALL     option on the FROZEN menu  Press the knob  the option displays    L RIGHT     By turning the  knob left or right  frozen waveforms on the screen will move left or right correspondingly   There is an arrow indicating upward under the right side of the last waveform  There is also a  time scale beside the arrow     OS    is used to mark the moment when waveforms are frozen   With waveforms moving right  this time mark will in turn change into  1S   2S   3S    These  time marks are applied to all waveforms on the screen     6 5 Recording Frozen Waveform    In the Freeze status  you may output displayed frozen waveforms via the recorder  Maximum  2 waveforms can be output at one time  On the FROZEN menu  the pull down lists of both     WAVE 1    and    WAVE 2    give you all names of frozen waveforms on the screen  from which  you may select two  Select the    REC    option on the FROZEN menu to output parameters  generated upon the freezing moment and the two selected frozen waveforms  If one of the  two selected waveforms is closed or not available  only parameters and the other waveform  are recorded  If these two selected waveforms are all closed or not available  only parameters  are recorded  As for the function of recording frozen waveforms  you can only record the  waveforms displayed upon the freezing moment  The recording time length is the same
144. emia and neuropathy in the limb wearing the cuff  When  monitoring a patient  examine the extremities of the limb frequently for normal color   warmth and sensitivity  If any abnormality is observed  stop the blood pressure  measurements     7  To stop continuous measuring   During continuous measuring press START button on the front panel at any time to stop  continuous measurement     A Note A    If you are in doubt about the accuracy of any reading s   check the patient s vital signs  by an alternative method before checking the functioning of the monitor     A Warning A    If liquid is inadvertently splashed on the equipment or its accessories  or may enter the  conduit or inside the monitor  contact local Customer Service Center     Measurement Limitations    To different patient conditions  the oscillometric measurement has certain limitations  The  measurement is in search of regular arterial pressure pulse  In those circumstances when the  patient s condition makes it difficult to detect  the measurement becomes unreliable and  measuring time increases  The user should be aware that the following conditions could  interfere with the measurement  making the measurement unreliable or longer to derive  In  some cases  the patient s condition will make a measurement impossible      Patient Movement   Measurements will be unreliable or may not be possible if the patient is moving  shivering or  having convulsions  These motions may interfere with the detection of the arter
145. emperatures that exceed these limits could affect the  accuracy of the instrument and cause damage to the modules and circuits  Allow at least 2  inches  5cms  clearance around the instrument for proper air circulation     Power Source Requirements  Refer to chapter Production Specification   Grounding the PM 9000 Portable Patient Monitor    To protect the patient and hospital personnel  the cabinet of the PM 9000 Portable Patient  Monitor must be grounded  Accordingly  the PM 9000 Portable Patient Monitor is equipped  with a detachable 3 wire cable which grounds the instrument to the power line ground   protective earth  when plugged into an appropriate 3 wire receptacle  If a 3 wire receptacle is  not available  consult the hospital electrician  If completeness of the protective grounding wire  is in doubt  the equipment must be operated with internal power supply        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  10 1    Patient Safety    AN Warning A    Do not use a 3 wire to 2 wire adapter with this instrument     Connect the grounding wire to the equipotential grounding terminal on the main system  If it is  not evident from the instrument specifications whether a particular instrument combination is  hazardous or not  for example due to summation of leakage currents  the user should consult  the manufacturers concerned or else an expert in the field  to ensure that the necessary  safety of all instruments concerned will not be impaired by the proposed combination     Equip
146. en the  sensor is facing in the proper direction     The site of placement should be away from any craniotomy flap  preferably via a contralateral  burr hole     The dura mater should be carefully stripped at least 2cm under the skull and 180   in arc  before insertion  Failure to do this will result in wedging of the pressure sensor and inaccurate  readings     Protect the catheter  Use thick sutures and put tape around the catheter before  suturing  Remove all bone chips  Use bone wax     Use of a tunnel is recommended  A short length  of a large bore catheter can be passed first to act  as a guide for the sensor tip  Remove the guide  from the burr hole end after the ICT B has been  passed to the burr hole from the tunnel entrance     Note that both edges are smoothed   This will help to prevent damage to  the catheter          OOO  se A         Strip the dura at least 2 cm under the inner table  of the skull  Strip in an arc of at least 180          Figure 16 11 ICT B application  Reseat the transducer tip after a few days since the dura may rapidly tighten and change its  physical characteristics     If possible  round the bone at the point where the catheter makes its first bend into the burr  hole and round the bone where the catheter makes the second bend under the cranium  This       Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  16 17    IBP Monitoring    will help to prevent tearing the catheter or tip during insertion or removal  A tear will require  the device to be ret
147. ent of this manual is subject to changes without prior notice   PROPERTY OF   SHENZHEN MINDRAY BIO MEDICAL ELECTRONICS CO   LTD  2002  ALL RIGHTS RESERVED    Responsibility on the manufacturer party    Mindray is responsible for safety  reliability and performance of this equipment only in the  condition that        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  l       e all installation  expansion  change  modification and repair of this equipment are conducted  by Mindray qualified personnel  and     e applied electrical appliance is in compliance with relevant National Standards  and   e the monitor is operated under strict observance of this manual     A Note A    This equipment is not intended for family usage     A Warning A    This monitor is not a device for treatment purpose     It is important for the hospital or organization that employs this equipment to carry out a  reasonable maintenance schedule  Neglect of this may result in machine breakdown or injury  of human health        II Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4        Warranty    Workmanship  amp  Materials    Mindray guarantees new equipment other than accessories to be free from defects in  workmanship and materials for a period of 18 months  six months for multi site probes and  SpO2 sensor  from date of shipment under normal use and service  Mindray s obligation  under this warranty is limited to repairing  at Mindray   s option  any part which upon Mindray s  examination proves defective     THIS WARRANTY
148. eplace it only when it is damaged or  becomes loosely connected  This tube can be cleaned and disinfected     Cleaning  use cloth moistened with warm soap water to clean the tube  Do not immerse  the tube into the liquid     Disinfection  use cloth moistened with cool chemical disinfector  ramification mainly  containing aldehyde  ethanol or ramification mainly containing ethanol  to clean the tube   Do not immerse the tube into the liquid  After cleaning  use wet cloth to wipe off the  disinfector and then use dry cloth to wipe the tube     H Occlusion handling    If the AG module passage is occluded  the screen will display the message    AG  OCCLUSION     Following are a few examples of occlusion  which you may remove one  by one until this message disappears     Entrance Occlusion    If the part at the entrance such as filter  sample line or airway connector is occluded by  condensed water  the screen will display the message telling that the airway is occluded     The optimal method to remove clogs of this kind is   check for clogs in entrance parts   a  replace the bacteria filter at the entrance   b  check the sample pipe for clogs and or entangle  If necessary  replace it     c  Check the airway connector for water  If necessary  drain off the water and install  the connector again     Internal Occlusion    If the interior of the AG module is contaminated by condensed water  the screen will also  display the message telling that the airway is occluded     The optimal 
149. er   s manual  V 5 4  13 17    SpO2 Monitoring    peripheral circulation and the skin every 2 hours  If any unfavorable changes take  place  you should change the measured position in time     In the process of extended and continuous monitoring  you should periodically  check the position of the sensor  In case that the position of the sensor moves  during monitoring  the measurement accuracy may be affected     13 2 4 Limitations for Measurement    Measurement Limitations   In operation  the accuracy of oximetry readings can be affected by      High frequency electrical noise  including noise created by the host system  or noise  from external sources  such as electrosurgical apparatus connected to the system      Do not use oximeters and oximetry sensors during magnetic resonance imaging  MRI    scanning  Induced current could potentially cause burns    Intravascular dye injections   Excessive patient movement   External light radiation   Improper sensor installation or incorrect contact position of the patient   Sensor temperature  optimal temperature between 28   C and 42   C     Placement of the sensor on an extremity that has a blood pressure cuff  arterial catheter    or intravascular line      Significant concentrations of dysfunctional hemoglobin  such as carboxyhemoglobin and  methemoglobin       SpO   too low     Bad circular injection of the part being measured     Shock  anemia  low temperature and application of vasomotor may all cause the arterial  blood flow 
150. er area     ALM LEV  there are three options     HIGH        MED    and    LOW        HIGH    refers to  the most serious alarm  followed by    MED    and    LOW    in the order of descending  seriousness  The default alarm level is    MED        ALM REC  if it is    ON     when anesthetic gas parameter has alarm  the recorder  will output the alarm information  The default is    OFF        EtCO2 ALM HI  used to adjust the upper alarm limit of EtCO2  When the measured  value is larger than ECO  upper alarm limit  the    EtCO2 HIGH    message is  displayed on the screen  In the UNLATCH mode  this message disappears when  the measured value is below the upper alarm limit     EtCO2 ALM LO  used to adjust the lower alarm limit of EtCO2  When the  measured value is smaller than EtCO  lower alarm limit  the    EtCO2 LOW     message is displayed on the screen  In the UNLATCH mode  this message  disappears when the measured value is above the lower alarm limit     FiCO ALM HI  used to adjust the upper alarm limit of FiCO2  When the measured  value is larger than FCO  upper alarm limit  the    FiCO2 HIGH    message is  displayed on the screen  In the UNLATCH mode  this message disappears when  the measured value is below the upper alarm limit     FCO  ALM LO  used to adjust the lower alarm limit of FiCO2  When the measured       Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  19 5    Anesthetic Gas Measurement    value is smaller than FiCO2 lower alarm limit  the    FiCO2 LOW    message is  d
151. erial  Ethylate  and Acetaldehyde    Appropriate sterilization materials for ECG lead  blood pressure cuff are introduced in  Chapters ECG RESP Monitoring  Chapter NIBP Monitoring respectively     A Caution A    m Follow the manufacturer   s instruction to dilute the solution  or adopt the lowest  possible density    Do not let liquid enter the monitor    No part of this monitor can be subjected to immersion in liquid    Do not pour liquid onto the monitor during sterilization     Use a moistened cloth to wipe up any agent remained on the monitor     11 5 Disinfection    To avoid extended damage to the equipment  disinfection is only recommended when  stipulated as necessary in the Hospital Maintenance Schedule  Disinfection facilities should  be cleaned first     Appropriate disinfection materials for ECG lead  SpO2 sensor  blood pressure cuff  TEMP  probe  IBP sensor and CO cable are introduced in Chapters 12 18 respectively     A Caution A    Do not use EtO gas or formaldehyde to disinfect the monitor        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  11 3    Chapter 12 ECG RESP Monitoring    12 1 What Is ECG Monitoring    Monitoring the ECG produces a continuous waveform of the patient s cardiac electric activity  to enable an accurate assessment of his current physiological state  Only proper connection  of the ECG cables can ensure satisfactory measurement  On the Normal Display  PM 9000  provides display of 2 channel ECG waveforms     m The patient cable consists of 2 part
152. es  voltage variation in Uy  for 5 cycle continued operation during  on power supply   70  Ur  30  dip power mains interruptions  it is  input lines in Ur   for 25   70  Ur  30  dip   recommended that the monitor  IEC 61000 4 11 cycle in U7  for 25 cycle   be powered from an  uninterruptible power supply or   lt 5  Ur   gt 95     lt 5  Us   gt 95  dip   a battery   dip in U   for 5   in U7  for 5 sec  sec  Power frequency magnetic  eae Geier fields should be at levels  3 A m 3 A m characteristic of a typical    magnetic field IEC    61000 4 8             location in a typical commercial  of hospital environment           NOTE     Uzis the a c  mains voltage prior to application of the test level        TABLE 3       Guidance and manufacturer   s declaration     electromagnetic immunity       Portable and mobile RF communications equipment should be used no closer to any part of the monitor   including cables  than the recommended separation distance calculated from the equation applicable to  the frequency of the transmitter        NOTE 1     A 80 MHz and 800 MHz  the higher frequency range applies   NOTE 2     These guidelines may not apply in all situations  Electromagnetic propagation is affected  by absorption and reflection from structures  objects and people        The monitor is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below  The customer or  the user of the monitor should assure that it is used in such an environment                             e 
153. etail is described in the following pages            ep        AN Warning A    Make sure that the computational constant for the measurement is appropriate to the  catheter used     A Note A    The blood temperature alarm will not function during CO measurement  It will resume  automatically when the measurement is over     17 2 2 CO Measuring  A Warning A    Make sure that appurtenance applied is in conformity with relevant Medical Device  Safety Requirements        17 2 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     CO Measuring    A Warning A    Appurtenance should be avoided from contact with conductive metal body when being  connected or applied     C O  Measurement Window    Enter WINDOW FOR C O  MEASUREMET and start C O  measurement  If CO transducer is  not connected  the monitor will prompt    No Sensor  unable to measure C O      on the screen    WINDOW FOR CO MEASUREMENT  2 0 C    CO0Cl min  o  2 49          CICl minsm 2   3 3    BSA m 2   0 743     em    TECC    37 0        TICC   2 0    EH EI  EI E    o EE 1 s 20s 30s    Ready for new measurement    Measurement Time  START STOP CANCEL REC g    U 00 00 Scale X Scale Y EDIT  gt  gt     Back to the upper menu     Figure 17 2 Contents in C O  Measurement Window          H Contents displayed in the C O  Window    Measurement curve   Prompt message  refer to Measuring the Cardiac Ouput for details  Start time of the measurement   CO  Cardiac Output   Cl  Cardiac Index   BSA  Body Surface Area   TB  Blood Temperature    OOO
154. f   the patient  Check the  ASS TOEE ASYSTOLE  connection of the electrodes  and lead wires   Check the current situation of  i i Patient suffers from Arr  of   the patient  Check the  KEE VFIB VTAC  connection of the electrodes  and lead wires   Check the current situation of  i    i Patient suffers from Arr  of   the patient  Check the  COUPEET COUPLET  connection of the electrodes  and lead wires   Check the current situation of  i i Patient suffers from Arr  Of   the patient  Check the  BIGEMINY BIGEMINY  connection of the electrodes  and lead wires   Check the current situation of    n Patient suffers from Arr  of   the patient  Check the  EEN TRIGEMINY  connection of the electrodes  and lead wires    RON T  Patient suffers from Arr  of R   Check the current situation of          Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  1       System Alarm Prompt       ON T     the patient  Check the  connection of the electrodes  and lead wires         PVC     Patient suffers from Arr  of  PVC     Check the current situation of  the patient  Check the  connection of the electrodes  and lead wires         TACHY     Patient suffers from TACHY     Check the current situation of  the patient  Check the  connection of the electrodes  and lead wires         BRADY     Patient suffers from BRADY     Check the current situation of  the patient  Check the  connection of the electrodes  and lead wires         VT gt 2     Patient suffers from Arr  of  VT gt 2     Check the current situation of  the
155. firmation     PITCH TONE function    When SPO2 changes  if the    BEAT VOL    in    ECG SETUP    menu is set to a value other than     0     which means    BEAT VOL    is switched ON   the heart beat volume will change  automatically according to SPO2 value  This monitor has 20 kinds of PITCH TONE  the higher  the SPO2 value is  the higher the PITCH TONE will be     Although these 20 kinds of PITCH TONE could not be adjusted in menu  their volume could  be controlled  For example  when    SPO2    is selected as    HR SOURCE    in    ECG SETUP     menu  the volume of PITCH TONE will be controlled by    PR SOUND    in    SPO2 SETUP     menu  If other item than    SPO2    is selected as    HR SOURCE    in    ECG SETUP    menu  the  volume of PITCH TONE will be consequently controlled by    BEAT SOUND    in    ECG SETUP     MENU     A Note       When SPO2 module is switched OFF  PITCH TONE function will become disabled  automatically     13 2 6 Alarm Description and Prompt    SpO2 Alarm Message    When the alarm switches are set to ON in relevant menus  the physiological alarms caused  by the parameter exceeding the alarm limit may possibly trigger the recorder to automatically  output alarming parameter value and corresponding waveforms     TABLES BELOW DESCRIBE THE POSSIBLE PHYSIOLOGICAL ALARMS   TECHNICAL ALARMS AND PROMPT MESSAGES OCCURRING DURING SPO        13 20 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     MEASUREMENT     Physiological alarm     Message    SPO2 TOO HIGH    Ca
156. foot  Hold the sensor  pull the belt and fit one of its  sides with    V    edge into the    V    groove on the corresponding side of the sheath  Appropriately  elongate the belt  about 20mm  and fit the    V    edge of the other side of the belt into the    V     groove of the other side of the sheath and then loosen the belt  After the    V    edges of the two  sides of the belt fit well into the    V    grooves on the two sides of the sheath  put the belt into  the first lock bar to fasten the belt  See figure 13 6  If the belt is too much long  you may put it  into the second lock bar  You must position the SpO  sensor in this way so as to make the  photoelectric component face the correct position  In the mean time  note not to elongate the  belt too much  which may lead to inaccurate measurement and also blocking the blood    circulation severely     Figure 13 6 mounting of the neonate sensor       AN Note AN    If the sensor cannot be positioned accurately to the part to be measured  it may  result in inaccurate SpO  reading  or even that the SpO  cannot be measured  because no pulse is detected  If this is true  you must position the sensor again   The excessive patient movement may result in inaccurate reading  In this situation   you must keep the patient quiet or change the part for monitoring to reduce the  adverse influence of excessive movement     AY Warning A    In the process of extended and continuous monitoring  you should check the       Patient Monitor us
157. form is identical with that of this monitor  The  feature description of the displayed waveform is given above the waveform  Sweep  speed is also identical with that set up for the same waveform on this monitor     H Technical Information area    Technical Information area is to the right of patient name in Viewbed Screen  This area  displays related technical information to Viewbed  such as due to network failure or  network too busy  Viewbed is disabled     m Close Viewbed Screen    In the FACE SELECT menu  select options of other operating screens to close the  Viewbed Screen     H Rules for automatically selecting monitor to be viewed and waveform    When you turn on the monitor or enter Viewbed Screen  the system will automatically  select a networked bedside monitor and a waveform of this monitor for you to view  If  the monitor being currently viewed is disconnected  the viewed monitor will  automatically close  clear displays of all alarms  parameters and waveforms  However  in this situation  the Viewbed Screen still displays  If you want to view another monitor   you must select again through using hot keys     If a measure module of the viewed monitor is plugged out or closed  its corresponding  waveform will disappear and the waveform in the Waveform area will not be refreshed   Instead this Waveform area will display empty  At this time  if you want to view other  waveforms of this monitor  you need to select again     A Note A    When connecting by using wireles
158. front of the monitor    Do not wipe the inner part of the connector socket when cleaning the monitor   When the reusable cuff is not connected with the monitor  or being cleaned   always place the cover on the rubber tube to avoid liquid permeation     Reusable Blood Pressure Cuff    The cuff can be sterilized by means of conventional autoclaving  gas  or radiation sterilization  in hot air ovens or disinfected by immersion in decontamination solutions  but remember to  remove the rubber bag if you use this method  The cuff should not be dry cleaned        14 10 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     NIBP Monitoring    The cuff can also be machine washed or hand washed  the latter method may prolong the  service life of the cuff  Before washing  remove the latex rubber bag  and for  machine washing  close the Velcro fastening  Allow the cuff to dry thoroughly after washing   then reinsert the rubber bag        Tc           LS      gt     aaveen    Ss orel  Szis INAY U  OVE NOVINI Sa  A    Io  omourmneg       Eil XOTA                Figure 14 5 Replace Rubber Bag in Cuff    To replace the rubber bag in the cuff  first place the bag on top of the cuff so that the rubber  tubes line up with the large opening on the long side of the cuff  Now roll the bag lengthwise  and insert it into the opening on the long side of the cuff  Hold the tubes and the cuff and  shake the complete cuff until the bag is in position  Thread the rubber tubes from inside the  cuff  and out through t
159. ge to the transducer may result     A Warning A  Do not immerse or soak the electrical connector end in any kind of fluid or liquid     A Warning A    The total volume of air injected to check the zero or baseline must not exceed 0 5ml or  the membrane over the sensor may be ruptured     A Warning A    Do not press with thumb and forefinger on the tip of the ICT B  Enormous pressures  will be generated this way and the device will be subject to possible damage  To see if  the ICT B is operating  gently touch the sensor tip     A Note A    Carefully check for cuts on the silicone of the catheter and sensor tip before use       PLACING THE ICT B    A Note A    Burr hole edges must be rounded where the catheter makes an  S  bend into the  epidural space  Evacuate all bone chips     A Note A    The catheter should be protected by suitable means where sutures are placed  This will  prevent damage to the catheter when pulling sutures tight     A Warning A    Do not use haemostats or forceps as these will damage the device     A Note A    When removing the catheter  care should be taken not to nick the device while cutting       16 14 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     IBP Monitoring    sutures  Pull slowly on the catheter to remove the ICT B     16 7 3 Connection to the pressure monitor    A Note A    Although the catheter tip pressure transducer sensor is electrically isolated from the  patient  it is recommended that pressure monitors with patient isolation be used for  s
160. h   o  indicates systolic value   t  indicates    diastolic value  and     indicates mean value   To select trend graph of a specific parameter     Pick PARA SELECT item  the first selection of the upper line  and select a requested  parameter name by turning the knob        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  8 1    Trend and Event    To select 1 hour or 72 hour trend graph     Pick RESOLUTION item  the latter selection of the upper line   choose 1 or 5 sec for 1 hour  trend graph and 1  5 or 10 min for 72 hour trend graph     To view other trend curves     When       appears on the right part of the screen  pick  L RIGHT   the button at the  extreme left of the lower line   turn the knob clockwise to view later trend curves  When   r  appears on the left part of the screen  pick the same item  turn the knob counterclockwise to  view earlier trend curve     To change the display scale    Pick the    ZOOM    button in the lower line to adjust the y axis scale and thus change the trend  curve in proportion  The value beyond maximum value will be represented by the maximum  value     To obtain trend data of a specific time    The time to which the cursor points will change as the knob is turned  Parameter at this time  is displayed below the x axis  When   fr  appears on the right part of the screen  the trend  graph pages down for later trend curve as the cursor moves here  When        appears on  the left part of the screen  the trend graph pages up for earlier trend curv
161. he name of the waveform is displayed on the upper left part of the waveform  The user may  choose ECG lead based on the requirements  The gain of the channel and the filter way are  also displayed on each ECG waveform  A 1mV scale bar is also displayed to the right side of  ECG waveform  The IBP waveform scale can also be selected according to the actual  requirement  Its range is described in the part  Measure IBP  In the IBP waveform area  the  waveform scale is displayed  The three dotted lines for each IBP waveform form up to down  represent respectively the upper limit scale  reference scale and lower limit scale  The values  of these three scales can be set  The specific method is given in the part  Measure IBP    When menu is wanted during screen operation  the menu always occupies the fixed position  in the middle part of the waveform area  therefore part of waveform can not be viewed  temporarily  After exiting the menu  the system will restores the original screen    The user may set up the rate to refresh the waveform  The method to adjust the refreshing  rate of each waveform is discussed in the setup description of each parameter     Parameter Area    The parameter area lies to the right side of the waveform area  whose position basically  corresponds to the waveform  The parameters displayed in the parameter area include   ECG      heart rate or pulse rate  unit  beats minute       The ST analyzing result of channel 1 and 2  ST1  ST2  unit  mV       PVCs j unit 
162. he setup lower alarm limit     User selectable       EtSEV HIGH    The measured EtSEV value exceeds  the setup upper alarm limit     User selectable       EtSEV LOW    FIENF HIGH    The measured EtSEV value is below  the setup lower alarm limit     The measured FiENF value exceeds  the setup upper alarm limit     User selectable    User selectable       FIENF LOW    The measured FiIENF value is below  the setup lower alarm limit     User selectable       EtENF HIGH    The measured EtENF value exceeds  the setup upper alarm limit     User selectable       EtENF LOW    The measured EtENF value is below  the setup lower alarm limit     User selectable          19 10    Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     Anesthetic Gas Measurement       The measured AwWRR value exceeds          AwRR HIGH the setup upper alarm limit  User selectable  The measured AwRR value is below   AwRR LOW the setup lower alarm limit  KEES   GAS APNEA ALM Respiration cannot be detected during HIGH    specified time interval        Technical alarms                                                     status     Message Cause Alarm Level   AG NO WATERTRAP The AG watertrap falls off from the monitor  Medium   CHANGE AG WATERTRAP Replace the AG watertrap Medium   AG WATERTRAP TYPE The type of the AG watertrap being used is Medium   WRONG not suitable    AG INIT FAIL AG module has failure  High   AG COMM STOP GE failure or communication High   AG OCCLUSION  lt 2omimin  which exceeds 1 seconds Hh   AG COMM ER
163. he small hole under the internal flap     Disposable Blood Pressure Cuffs    Disposable cuffs are intended for one patient use only  Do not use the same cuff on any other  patient  Do not sterilize or use autoclave on disposable cuffs  Disposable cuffs can be cleaned  using soap solution to prevent infection     A Note AY    For protecting environment  the disposable blood pressure cuffs must be recycled or  disposed of properly        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  14 11    Chapter 15 TEMP Monitoring    15 1 TEMP Monitoring    Two TEMP probes can be used together to obtain 2 temperature data and compare them to   work out the temperature difference    TEMP monitoring setup   m If you are using disposable TEMP probes you need to plug the TEMP cable into the  monitor and then connect the probe to the cable  With a reusable TEMP probe you can  plug the probe directly into the monitor    H Apply the TEMP probe s  securely to the patient    WR Switch on the system     A Warning A    Verify probe cables fault detection before beginning of monitoring phase  Unplug the  temperature probe cable of the channel 1 from the socket  the screen will display the  error message    TEMP SENSOR1 OFF    and the audible alarm is activated  The other  channel is the same     AN warning       If use two TEMP probes  them must be made by the same manufacture     A Note A    Disposable TEMP probe can only be used once for one patient     A warning      The calibration of the temperature mea
164. his channel    Inflate sphygmomanometer and obtain the value of pressure to preset value in menu   Repeatedly adjust the calibrating pressure value in the menu or the pressure value of  sphygmomanometer until they are equal    Push CALIBRATION button  the monitor starts calibrating process    Wait for the result of calibration  determine the action according to the prompt message   After calibration  disconnect the tube of sohygmomanometer and the T type connector   then connect the transducer to the patient by following specified steps     Related information to calibration   for this example CH1 is used   e    SUCCESSFUL CALIBRATION       CH1 work properly  User could perform IBP monitoring via CH1        SENSOR OFF   FALL       Check the connection of CH1 transducer  Ensure no    SENSOR OFF  FALL    message  prompts  and Execute calibration  If problem still exists  contact serviceman        IN DEMO  FAIL       Ensure that the monitor is not in DEMO mode  Execute calibration  If problem still  exists  contact serviceman        PRESSURE OVER RANGE  FAIL       Make sure that you have selected transducer value in IBP CAL  then proceed  calibration        PULSATILE PRESSURE  FALL       Ensure that the pressure value of the sphygmomanometer is constant  Execute  calibration  If problem still exists  contact serviceman     IBP SCALE ADJUST submenu     IBP SCALE ADJUST    HI LO VAL    CH1 ART Ise d o    CH2 CVUP 40   0   20      Ad just the value of the upper  scale  the upper do
165. hown as below     IBP 1 2  SELECT    IBP SETUP    IBP PRESSURE ZERO  IBP PRESSURE CALIBRATE    Access IBP setup menu     EXIT  Figure 16 2 IBP SELECT Menu       Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  16 3    IBP Monitoring    IBP 1 2  SETUP  ALM FILTER NO FILTER      ALM LEV MED   ALM LIMIT SETUP  gt  gt   ALM REC OFF z SCALE ADJUST  gt  gt   AMP ADJUST MANUAL   EXPAND PRESSURE  gt  gt   SWEEP 25 0   DEFAULT  gt  gt   UNIT mmHg   e    Open or close the IBP alarn     EXIT    Figure 16 3 IBP SETUP Menu    Options that could be set up are     ALM  Select    ON    to enable alarm and data storage during IBP alarm  Select    OFF     to disable physiological alarm and display the 2 symbol beside    IBP    numeric   ALM LEV  Set up the alarm level  Three levels are available  HIGH  MED  LOW   ALM REC  Select    ON    to enable recording once IBP alarm occurs  Select OFF    to  disable recording function    AMP ADJUST  adjust waveform amplitude  Two selections are available  MANUAL   AUTO  Set it to AUTO  the pressure names of IBP become P1 and P2  and the IBP  scale is adjusted by system automatically  Set it to MANUAL  the pressure names  of IBP can choose one of ART  PA  CVP  RAP  LAP  ICP  P1  P2  and the IBP scale  is adjusted by the user via SCALE ADJUST item    SWEEP  Select the scanning speed of the IBP wave  Two selections are available   12 5 mm s or 25 mm s    UNIT  Select the pressure unit  mmHg or kPa     FILTER  Select filtering mode of system  Three selections are ava
166. ial pressure  pulses  In addition  the measurement time will be prolonged      Cardiac Arrhythmia s   Measurements will be unreliable and may not be possible if the patient s cardiac arrhythmia  has caused an irregular heartbeat  The measuring time thus will be prolonged      Heart lung Machine       14 4 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     NIBP Monitoring    Measurements will not be possible if the patient is connected to a heart lung machine      Pressure Changes   Measurements will be unreliable and may not be possible if the patient s blood pressure is  changing rapidly over the period of time during which the arterial pressure pulses are being  analyzed to obtain the measurement      Severe Shock   If the patient is in severe shock or hypothermia  measurements will be unreliable since  reduced blood flow to the peripheries will cause reduced pulsation of the arteries      Heart Rate Extremes   Measurements can not be made at a heart rate of less than 40 bpm and greater than 240  bpm     14 2 2 NIBP monitoring screen    NIBP measurement result and corresponding message are displayed as follows     Time of measurement    NIBP 16  50 mmHg     gt  BPuit  NS    M t val  easurement value      gt  108 84 70 160     gt  NS Alarm limit  Measurement mode     gt  MANUAL Jd Current cuff pressure    Message        gt  Manual measure        CUFF  100    14 3 NIBP SETUP menu  Pick the NIBP hot key on the screen to call up the NIBP menu shown as below     NIBP SETUP    ALM ON  gt
167. icone sealant to the damage     The most common reason for failure of the ICT B pressure transducer is physical damage to  the device s silicone catheter and or tip  The cuts are usually caused by sharp bone segments  and are not always visible to the naked eye  If such damage remains undetected fluids may  enter the device and damage the sensing element  Check for damage as described in the    Cleaning section of this manual     16 7 7 SOME COMMONLY ASKED QUESTIONS       QUESTION    ANSWER       Is the ICT B a single use device     No  it is designed to be reused many times        If it is damaged  what shall we do     Does the air used for checking the zero get  into the patient     Sterilize first  Then  obtain a purchase order  for repair and send it back to Manufactory for  repair     No  Air used for checking the zero stays in  the fine lumens and tip of the ICT B until the  syringe is removed        What happens if we autoclave the ICT B     It will have to be returned to Manufactory for  repair        We inject air to check the zero but the  baseline on the scope always returns to ICP  even if we leave the syringe attached  What  is wrong     There is a leak in the catheter or sensor tip   Remove  wipe clean with alcohol and then  sterilize  Return the device to Manufactory for  repair        Readings were taken with the syringe left  attached until we noticed it  Can we rely on  these readings     No  They are incorrect  All pressure readings  must be made with the p
168. idestream module occurring occlusion  first check kinks for    sampling line  If no kinks are found  then check water trap after disconnecting sample line    from the Watertrap  If the occlusion message on the screen disappears  the sampling line    must be replaced  If the occlusion message on the screen remains  the Watertrap must be    replaced     4  No routine calibration required in both Mainstream and Sidestream CO2 module        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     Chapter 19 Anesthetic Gas  Measurement    19 1 General    AG module is used to measure respiratory and anesthetic gases of a patient during  anesthesia  This module provides et  end tidal  values and inspired values of various gases  listed below     E CO      here it represents the measured EtCO2 value  maximum expired gas  value   maximum expired gas value tested during expiring period     E N20     nitrous oxide  E O      optional function  m AwRR    _ respiring time per minute    The system can simultaneously display the waveforms of 4 anesthetic gases  COs  N20  O2  and an anesthetic waveform  The default is to display CO2 waveform     Parameters that can be displayed simultaneously are COs  NO  Oz and AA  it refers to  anesthetic  DES  ISO  ENF  SEV  HAL   In addition  inspired and expired values are displayed  at the same time plus MAC  Minimal Alveolar Concentration  or BAL  Balance gas  and  AwRR     Definitions of parameter     COs   carbon dioxide   N O   nitrous oxide   O2   oxygen   AwRR 
169. ies    DRYLINE Airway Adapter Straight P N 60 14100 00 P N 9000 10 07486  DRYLINE Airway Adapter Elbow P N 60 14200 00 P N 9000 10 07487  Aion DRYLINE Water Trap  Adult  purchase No 60 13100 00 P N 9200 10 10530  Sampling Line Adult 2 5m  Adult  purchase No 60 15200 00 P N 9200 10 10533       Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  20 5       Manufacturer    Address    European  Representative    Product  Model Code    Appendix      EC Declaration of Conformance    Shenzhen Mindray Bio Medical Electronics  Co   Ltd     Mindray Building  Keji 12  Road South  Hi tech Industrial Park   Nanshan  Shenzhen  518057  P  R  China     Shanghai International Holding Corp  GmbH  Europe   Eiffestrasse 80 D 20537 Hamburg Germany    Patient Monitor   PM 9000   Standard Configuration including   ECG RESP  NIBP  SpOs  Battery  Options      Thermal Recorder     2 channel Temp     2 channel IBP     EtCO2 Sidestream      EtCO  Mainstream      Cardiac Output     Anaesthetic Gases     12 1  in   Color TFT     10 4  in   Color TFT    oO ON Oo Om FW DY      Classification MDD  Annex IX   Ilb    We herewith declare that the above mentioned products meet the provisions of the    following EC Council Directives and Standards  All supporting documentations are    retained under the premises of the manufacturer and the notified body        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  1    EC Declaration of Conformance    DIRECTIVES    General applicable directives   Medical Device Directive  COUNCIL DIRECTIVE
170. ilable  NORMAL   filter the waveform at the frequency of 16Hz   SMOOTH  filter the waveform at the  frequency of 8Hz  and NO FILTER  display the original waveform   The default is  NO FILTER    ALM LIMIT SETUP  Access the sub menu of IBP ALM LIMIT SETUP  in which user  may set up the upper and lower alarm limit of systolic pressure  diastolic pressure  and mean pressure respectively for channel 1 and channel 2    SCALE ADJUST  Access the sub menu of IBP SCALE ADJUST  in which user  may adjust the position of the high  reference and low scales for the two waveforms  displayed on the screen    EXPAND PRESSURE  Access the sub menu of IBP EXPAND PRESSURE  user  could select the pressure type to be represented by P1 and P2    DEFAULT  Access the IBP DEFAULT CONFIG dialog  in which user could select  FACTORY DEFAULT CONFIG or USER DEFAULT CONFIG  After selecting an  option and exiting the dialog  the system will pop up a dialog asking for  confirmation    EXIT  Exit the menu and return to the upper menu       Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     IBP Monitoring    A Warning A    Before setting the alarm limits  confirm to choose the correct label     IBP ALM LIMIT SETUP    SYS MEAN DIA    CH1 ART ALM HI 110    CH1 ART ALM LO 390   70   50  CH2 CUP ALM HI       10         30       gt    gt  d    ah    ah    CH2 CUP ALM LO         9 Al  Set upper limit of IBP systolic pressure   If above upper limit  alarms occurs    EXIT    Figure 16 4 IBP ALM LIMIT SETUP    When the value exce
171. ilized or re used     A Note A    For protecting environment  the disposable transducers or domes must be reclaimed  or disposed properly    Sterilization    H Chemical solution Sterilization  Remove obvious contamination by using the cleaning procedure described previously   Select a sterilant that has been found effective to your hospital or institution for chemical  solution sterilization of operating room equipment  Buffered glutaraldehyde  e g  Cidex or  Hospisept  has been found to be effective  Do not use quaternary cationic detergents  such as zephiran chloride  If the whole unit is to be sterilized  immerse the transducer but  not the electrical connector into the sterilant for the recommended sterilizing period   Ensure that the dome has been removed  Then rinse all transducer parts except the  electrical connector with sterilized water or saline  The transducer must be thoroughly  dried before storing    mM Gas Sterilization  For more complete asepsis  use gas sterilization   Remove obvious contamination by using the cleaning procedure described previously  To  inhibit the formation of ethylene glycol when ethylene oxide gas is used as the  disinfectant  the transducer should be completely dry   Follow the operating instructions provided by the manufacturer of the gas disinfectant     A Warning A    The sterilize temperature must not exceed 70  C  158  F   Plastics in the pressure  transducer may deform or melt above this temperature     16 7 ICP Transducer ICT B  
172. ill exists  contact the  manufacturer for repair         NIBP  RESET     ILLEGALLY    During NIBP measurement   illegal reset occurs     Check the airway of NIBP to  see if there are clogs  Then  measure again  if the failure  still exists  contact the  manufacturer for repair         NIBP COMM ERR     The NIBP communication part  has problem     Execute the reset program in  the NIBP menu  If the failure  still exists  contact the  manufacturer for repair        The NIBP cuff is not connected                 LOOSE CUFF  Re connect the NIBP cuff   correctly   Check the connection of each  The NIBP cuff is not connected   part or replace with a new   AIR LEAK  correctly or there are leaks in   cuff  If the failure still exists   the airway  contact the manufacturer for  repair   Problem happens when   Check the connection of each   AIR PRESSURE   Measuring the curve  The   part or replace with a new  i system cannot perform   cuff  If the failure still exists   ERROR    measurement  analysis or   contact the manufacturer for  calculation  repair   Check if the setup of patient  PrOD em happens when type is correct  Check the  E es scure   TNE connection of each part or   WEAK SIGNAL  system cannot perform   p    replace with a new cuff  If the  measurement  analysis or l      e failure still exists  contact the  calculation   manufacturer for repair  Problem happens when   Check the connection of each  measuring the curve  The   part or replace with a new   RANGE EXCEEDED  sys
173. imit     User selectable       EtN20 LOW    The measured N O value is below  the setup lower alarm limit     User selectable       FIDES HIGH    The measured FIDES value exceeds  the setup upper alarm limit     User selectable       FIDES LOW    EtDES HIGH    The measured FIDES value is below  the setup lower alarm limit     The measured EtDES value exceeds  the setup upper alarm limit     User selectable    User selectable       EtDES LOW    FIHAL HIGH    The measured EtDES value is below  the setup lower alarm limit     The measured FiHAL value exceeds  the setup upper alarm limit     User selectable    User selectable       FIHAL LOW    The measured FiHAL value is below  the setup lower alarm limit     User selectable       EtHAL HIGH    The measured EtHAL value exceeds  the setup upper alarm limit     User selectable       EtHAL LOW    The measured EtHAL value is below  the setup lower alarm limit     User selectable       FiISO HIGH    The measured FilSO value exceeds  the setup upper alarm limit     User selectable       FiISO LOW    The measured FilSO value is below the  setup lower alarm limit     User selectable       EtISO HIGH    The measured EtISO value exceeds  the setup upper alarm limit     User selectable       EtISO LOW    The measured EtISO value is below  the setup lower alarm limit     User selectable       FISEV HIGH    The measured FISEV value exceeds  the setup upper alarm limit     User selectable       FISEV LOW    The measured FiSEV value is below  t
174. ineer or Mindray service staff   CUFF TYPE ERR EE E a LOW Select appropriate cuff type    comply with the          Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  14 9    NIBP Monitoring       patient type     Measuring time has  exceeded 120  seconds  adult  or 90  seconds  neonatal      Measure again or use other    NIBP TIME OUT measuring method     HIGH       NIBP ILLEGALLY Abnormal module    RESET reset HIGH Reset again       Problem happens   when measuring the   curve  The system Check the cuff  Make sure that the  MEASURE FAIL cannot perform HIGH patient under monitoring is   measurement  motionless  Measure again    analysis or   calculation        Prompt message   display in the prompt area below NIBP value                    Message Cause Alarm Level  Manual measure    During manual measuring mode   Cont measuring    During continuous measuring mode   Auto measuring    During automatic measuring mode   pigiea sian After selecting interval between  measurements in MENU  Press START STOP key during measuring  Measurement over  to stop measurement  No alarm    Calibrating       During calibrating       Calibration over    Calibration over       Pneum testing       During pneumatic test       Pneum test over    pneumatic test over       Resetting       Reset failed    NIBP module in resetting    NIBP module reset failed       14 5 Maintenance and Cleaning    A Warning A    m Do not squeeze the rubber tube on the cuff    Do not allow liquid to enter the connector socket at the 
175. information of other parameters is the same as HR     5 2 Alarm verification during power on    During PM 9000 power on  audible and visual alarm capability will be tested by the system   Every time when PM 9000 powers on  alarm beeps    DO      and the LED indicator on the  display device flashes yellow and red once  If no beeps heard or no alarm indicator flashing  viewed  do not use this device to monitor any patient  and notify Customer Service Center     5 3 Alarm Cause    Alarm occurs when    1 Physiological alarm is evoked    2  Alarm for error of the system  technical alarm  is evoked   3  General alert occurs     A  Conditions that activate the parameter alarms     When the measurement value exceeds the alarm limit and the alarm is set    ON     Alarm will  not activate if the alarm is set    OFF        B  Conditions that activate the system alarms  technical alarm      Upon the system error  the monitor prompts alarm immediately and proceeds corresponding  remedy  stops all monitoring and eliminates the final results in order to avoid faulted treatment   If more than one error occur  they will be displayed by turns     C  General alert    In some circumstances  alerts will behave as physiological alarm but in normal sense  we  don   t regard them as real patient health related items        5 4 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     Alarm    5 4 SILENCE and PAUSE    m SILENCE   Push the SILENCE button on the panel for more than 1 second  the system will shut off 
176. ings  The  level of increase is approximately equal to the amount of carboxyhemoglobin present   Dyes  or any substance containing dyes  that change usual arterial pigmentation may  cause erroneous readings     A Warning A    Do not use this instrument and the sensors during magnetic resonance imaging  MRI   scanning  Induced current could potentially cause burns  The monitor may affect the  MRI image  and the MRI unit may affect the accuracy of the oximetry measurements     A Warning A    Pulse oximetry can overestimate the SpO2 value in the presence of Hb CO  Met Hb or  dye dilution chemicals     AN Warning A    Verify sensor cable fault detection before beginning of monitoring phase  Unplug the  SpO  sensor cable from the socket  the screen will display the error message    SpO2  SENSOR OFF    and the audible alarm is activated     A Warning A    Do not use the sterile supplied SpO  sensors if the packaging or the sensor is  damaged and return them to the vendor        13 4 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     SpO   Monitoring    AN Warning A    Prolonged and continuous monitoring may increase jeopardy of unexpected change of  dermal condition such as abnormal sensitivity  rubescence  vesicle  repressive  putrescence  and so on  It is especially important to check the sensor placement of  neonate and patient of poor perfusion or immature dermogram by light collimation and  proper attaching strictly according to changes of the skin  Check per 2 3 hours the  sensor pla
177. ion and Prompt  17 9  17 6 Maintenance and Ceamimg  17 10  Chapter 18 CO2 Measuring            cccccecesceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeseseneeeneneeseaesaseeeenseaeeeeeseseaeeeneeeeees 18 1  IBA Eeer ola et Aah eet EE ad 18 1  18 2 Monitoring Procedure aeiia aa a a a a a a a a 18 1  18 3 COZ ET 18 3  18 4 Alarm Information and Prompt  18 7  18 5 Maintenance and ClCaAning           cccccceseceeeeeceeeeeceaeeeeeeeeceeeesaaeeeeaeeseeeeeseaeeesnaeeseenees 18 9  Chapter 19 AG Measuring  i start ideana e Aere e aa aara aone ai daana ro caaeaae aaae naai 19 1  KREE EE 19 1  19 2 Measuring principle and operating PrOCeSS          ce ee seceeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeteees 19 2  TOS AG MOM eebe Eed coed tees dE ee iad estes 19 4  19 4 Alarm Information and Prompt  19 9  19 5 Maintenance and Ceamimg  19 12  Chapter 20 Accessories and Ordering Information               ccccsccssseeeseeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeenees 20 1  20 1 ECGiACCESSONOES EE 20 1       Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  3    Content    20 2  SPO2 Accessories ss  ege  nti ae EE leaden EE 20 2  20 3  NIBP Accessories gees eege AEN EEN 20 3  20 4 TEMP Accessortes aea aaea a a aaa aa araa aana TERA aae 20 3  20 5  IBP e EE 20 3  20 6 CO ACCOSSONIES eotia eseina enna ER E Ratan er RAT SESE REN aA ROER Aan er RATA ed M AEEA RE SEKERE ASN 20 4  207 COZ ACCESSOMNES as ea ee a E E e a e EE EE E E EE 20 4  20 8 Anesthetic Gas Accessories        0  cccccccccceeseececeesneeeeeeaeeeeeeaaaeeecseaaeeeeesaeeeseesaeeesenaas 20 5  Appendix   EC D
178. iquids from entering the female luer on the electrical connector  A male plug may be  used to do this  This plug must be removed during normal use and ETO sterilization     1  Rinse and cold soak the catheter transducer in a solution of glutaraldehyde such as  Cidex  following the chemical manufacturer s instructions  Note that disinfecting does not  equal sterilisation and the strength of the glutaraldehyde must be confirmed by the  chemical manufacturer s instructions     2  After sterilisation of the catheter and just before use  rinse the device with pyrogen free   sterile distilled water or saline solution as recommended by the manufacturer of the       16 20 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     IBP Monitoring    sterilising agent     K Care of the ICT B    The metal sensor is very robust and can withstand severe shocks and vibrations  It can be  irreversibly damaged by contact with sharp objects or overpressure  for instance by squeezing  the tip between finger and thumb     The silicone coating on the sensing area allows a small amount of water absorption  During  this process  which may take an hour or more  the baseline may drift a few mmHg  The device  should be allowed to stabilize in water or saline before use for a few hours     Liquids entering the back of the sensor will cause damage to the sensor  Cuts to the outer  coating should be avoided and repaired immediately if any are found  Return to manufactory  or apply a temporary repair using a suitable sil
179. irically derived equation are based upon human blood studies against a laboratory  co oximeter on healthy adult volunteers in induced hypoxia studies     The above equations are combined and a noise reference  N     is determined     N      S 660    S 940  x R  If there is no noise N      0  then S 660    S 940  x R which is the same relationship for the  traditional pulse oximeter     The equation for the noise reference is based on the value of R  the value being seeked to  determine the oC  This instrument   s software sweeps through possible values of R that  correspond to SpO  values between 1  and 100  and generates an N    value for each of  these R values  The S 660  and S 940  signals are processed with each possible N    noise  reference through an adaptive correlation canceler  ACC  which yields an output power for  each possible value of R  i e   each possible SpoO   from 1  to 100    The result is a Discrete  Saturation Transform  DST     plot of relative output power versus possible SpO  value as  shown in the following figure where R corresponds to SpO    97         13 2 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     SpO   Monitoring    Discrete Saturation Transform       _ DST      Ei    b     S    C        O   C     Ss   s5   DO       8    o e   Zw   r H MIN Ill        cc oil Una iii  65 95 97 100    SpO     The DST plot has two peaks  the peak corresponding to the higher saturation is selected as  the SpO gt 2 value  This entire sequence is repeated once every t
180. isplayed on the screen     m  OTHER SETUP  pick this item in the menu to call up CO2 more setup sub menu     WAVE SCALE  LOW    WATERVAPOR ON        WORK MODE STANDBY   BTPS ON y  PUMP RATE 100ml min v DEFAULT  gt  gt   COMPENSATE GENERAL      Select the displaying amplitude of the COZ  wave     EXIT    Figure 18 4 CO2 More Setups Menu    Now we introduce you to the functions of each item in CO2 SETUP submenu    m WAVE SCALE  to adjust full scale size of CO2 waveform display area with    LOW    or     HIGH    selectable  The default value is    LOW       m PUMP RATE  to adjust the pump rate of the air pump of CO2 module with    100ml min         150ml min     or    200ml min    selectable  The default value is    100ml min      NOTE  This menu only functions to    SideStream       m WORK MODE  to change the work mode of CO2 with    MEASURE    mode or    STANDBY          18 4 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     CO2 Monitoring    mode selectable  The default is    STANDBY    mode  When it is required to monitor CO2   select    MEASURE    mode     STANDBY    mode disables the air pump in SideStream module   the sensor and the IR  infrared ray  source in MainStream module  thus decreases the  power consumption and extends the life cycles of IR source and the whole CO2 module     A Note A    When not using CO2 monitoring function  it is suggested not to connect MainStream  sensor or SideStream water trap and to adjust to    STANDBY    mode     m COMPENSATE  to perform diffe
181. isplayed on the screen  In the UNLATCH mode  this message disappears when  the measured value is above the lower alarm limit     EtO ALM HI  used to adjust the upper alarm limit of EtO2  When the measured  value is larger than EtO2 upper alarm limit  the    EtO2 HIGH    message is displayed  on the screen  In the UNLATCH mode  this message disappears when the  measured value is below the upper alarm limit     EtO2 ALM LO  used to adjust the lower alarm limit of EtO2  When the measured  value is smaller than EtO lower alarm limit  the    EtO LOW    message is  displayed on the screen  In the UNLATCH mode  this message disappears when  the measured value is above the lower alarm limit     FiO2 ALM HI  used to adjust the upper alarm limit of FiO2  When the measured  value is larger than FiO2 upper alarm limit  the    FiO2 HIGH    message is displayed  on the screen  In the UNLATCH mode  this message disappears when the  measured value is below the upper alarm limit     FCO  ALM LO  used to adjust the lower alarm limit of FiO2  When the measured  value is smaller than EiO2 lower alarm limit  the    FiO2 LOW    message is displayed  on the screen  In the UNLATCH mode  this message disappears when the  measured value is above the lower alarm limit     AwRR ALM HI  used to adjust the upper alarm limit of AWRR  When the measured  value is larger than AwRR upper alarm limit  the    AwRR HIGH    message is  displayed on the screen  In the UNLATCH mode  this message disappears when  the
182. itor to be viewed   the system will toggle to the display of the selected monitor for your view  The selected  waveform is one of those listed in the hot key of Select Waveform     The hot key of Select Waveform is used to select a waveform generated by the  monitor being viewed  If the hot key of Select Waveform displays    N A     it indicates that  the bedside monitor being viewed has no waveforms  You can use this hot key to  select and therefore view different waveforms of the monitor being viewed     E Alarm indicator of Viewbed    On the upper right side of the Viewbed Screen  there is an Alarm Indicator used to tell  the alarm status of the monitor being viewed  The activity of this alarm indicator is  identical with that of the alarm lamp on the panel of the monitor being viewed  That is  to say  if the monitor being viewed occurs medium low level alarm  this alarm indicator  illuminates yellow  if it occurs high level alarm  this alarm indicator illuminates red  If  the monitor being viewed has no alarm or the alarm is screened  the icon for this alarm  indicator will not be displayed     E Parameter area of Viewbed Screen    Under the hot key of Select Bed Number is the Parameter area  in which parameters       Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  4 5    Face Select    of all monitors being viewed are displayed   H Waveform area of Viewbed Screen    Under the hot key of Select Waveform is the Waveform area  The Sweep manner   refreshing or scrolling  of the wave
183. knob is called    cursor      Operation can be performed at any position at which the cursor can stay    When the cursor is in the waveform area  the user may immediately modify the current setup   When the cursor is in the parameter area  the user may open the setup menu of the  corresponding parameter module so as to set up the menu items of the module        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  1 9    Introduction    Operating method     RW Move the cursor to the item where the operation is wanted  WH Press the knob  RW One of the following four situations may appear     1 4    10 The cursor with background color may become into the frame without  background color  which implies that the content in the frame can change with  the rotation of the knob    20 Menu or measuring window may appear on the screen  or the original menu is   replaced by the new menu    30  A check mark    V     appears at the position  indicating that the item is confirmed        AT The system immediately executes a certain function     Interfaces    For the convenience of operation  the different kinds of interfaces are in different parts of the    monitor     At the right side is AG watertrap  Figure 1 4      and the recorder   s paper inlet cover Figure    1 40    as shown in Figure 1 4        Figure 1 4 Right Side    At the left side are the connectors to patient cables and the sensors  as shown in Figure 1 5    O       ad m SS ECKE EECH E     Socket for CO2 sensor   Socket for channel 1 TEMP 
184. ld not be used as the primary source of alarm notification   The audible and visual alarms of the monitor  used in conjunction with clinical signs  and symptoms  are the primary source for notifying medical personnel that an alarm  condition exists     3 9 DEMO function    Select the  DEMO  item in the    SYSTEM MENU    to call up the    ENTER DEMO PASSWORD      After entering the password  the system enters DEMO status    The purpose of waveform demonstration is only to demonstrate the machine performance   and for training purpose  In clinical application  this function is not forbidden because the  DEMO will mislead the medical staff to treat the DEMO waveform and parameter as the  actual data of the patient  which may result in the delay of treatment or mistreatment   Therefore before entering this menu  you shall enter password     INPUT DEMO KEY    KEY    2080 4    Back to the upper menu     Figure 3 23 Input Demo Key       3 16 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4        Chapter A Face Select    4 1    This monitor has four different operating screens  which are    Standard Screen        Trend  Screen        oxyCRG Screen     and    Viewbed Screen     When required  you can select  different operating screens for necessary information  Let   s probe into these four  operating screens one by one     Select Operating Screen    In the    SYSTEM MENU     select the    FACE SELECT    option in the    SYSTEM SETUP     menu to call up the dialog box as shown in the figure b
185. le   the CO2 concentration will compute from the detecting CO2 absorption intensity of patient  sample  The relation between partial pressure and percentage of CO2 concentration is given  below   P mmHg    Percentage      Pamp  ambient pressure     Of CO2 MainStream and CO2 SideStream modules  whichever is selected by the user   Autorun measuring mode is adopted  Rate for waveform sampling is 31 msec time  The  operating series for the two modules are respectively    MainStream work sequence  After the system is powered on  CO2 module automatically  begins warming up for about 45S to 90S  Then the sensor motor is activated  After 5S to 10S   the light source of infrared ray is opened  After 10S  the system enters the normal measuring  status    SideStream work sequence  Except the procedures that after being powered on  the system       Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  18 1    CO2 Monitoring    needs not warming up and the air pump should be activated  other procedures are the same    as those in MainStream sequence     CO2 measurement setups     1   2     Verify the type of the configured CO2 module  MainStream or SideStream     For MainStream  connect the sensor to the receptacle of CO2 module  For SideStream   plug the water trap onto its fixing chassis  Add a permanently used nafion tube between the  sampling line and the watertrap to further remove the influence of water vapor       Power on the system  For MainStream  technical prompt information of    CO2 WARM U
186. le and lead to system  contamination  clog or incorrect reading  In order to prevent clog  dispose the filter  each time after it is used on a patient  Do not try to disinfect or clean a used filter    Only use the sample line recommended especially for the system  Using other sample  line may reduce the performance and reliability of the AG module    If the sample line is tangled up  do not use it because the line in this condition may  have clog or leakage     19 3 Menus       Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  19 3    Anesthetic Gas Measurement    19 3 1 AG SETUP menu    Use the rotary knob to select the    GAS    hot key in the Parameter area to call out the    AG  SETUP    menu     AG SETUP    AGENT       v De COMPEN OFF k    c02 UNIT mmHg   SWEEP 123 g  02 UNIT mmHg   WORK MODE STANDBY    N20 UNIT z z ALARM SETUP  gt  gt     AA UNIT z v ADJUST WAVE AMP  gt  gt     PUMP RATE LOW   DEFAULT  gt  gt     Use the default configuration to       initialize all the menus   EXIT    Figure 19 3 AG SETUP menu    Detailed information about each item in the AG SETUP menu is     AGENT  used to select the name of the anesthetic to be monitored   CO2 UNIT  used to select the display unit of COs    O2 UNIT  used to select the display unit of O2    N20 UNIT  used to select the display unit of N20    AA UNIT  used to select the display unit of anesthetic    PUMP RATE  used to select the appropriate pump rate     O2 COMPEN  Oz compensation switch  When the Oz concentration is larger th
187. losed the alarm    sound permanently  This status terminates when you discharges the status     AN Note AY    If lag symbol appears  the system will no longer give audible alarm sound  You  must be very careful in using this function  Two ways can be used to discharge this  status  One is set the alarm volume to an option other than OFF in the USER MAINTAIN  menu  The other method is to press SILENCE button to make the flag turn to 2  And  then press SILENCE again and the system will restore the normal alarm status     m Parameter alarm information is displayed always in the upper right corner of the screen   m When the waveforms on the screen are frozen  the FREEZE prompt will appear in the  bottom part of the screen     Waveform   Menu Area    The waveform area can maximally display 8 waveforms  The displaying order of the  waveforms on the screen can be adjusted  For the maximum configuration  the waveforms  provided by the system for selection are  2 ECG waveforms  SpO2 waveform  4 waveforms of  IBP module  IBP1 2 3 4   RESP waveform  CO2 waveform and 4 waveforms of AG  module CO2 N20 02 AA   But CO2 waveforms and AG waveforms can   t display at the same  time    All the waveforms in the system are listed out in the    WAVEFORM SETUP    menu  The user  may select the waveform to be displayed and adjust their displaying positions  The specific       1 6 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     Introduction    method is illustrated in the part  Set Up Screen Waveform    T
188. m Menu    m ANALOG OUT  if being selected  the AUX OUTPUT port will be used to realize     ANANOG OUT    function while NURSE CALL function is switched off at the same time   And visually the    NURSE CALL SETUP    item in    USER MAINTAIN    menu will become  gray indicating that the function is disabled    m NURSE CALL  if being selected  the AUX OUTPUT port will be used to realize NURSE  CALL function while    ANALOG OUT    function is switched off at the same time     For the  LEAD NAMING  item  you can select    AHA    or    EURO     To know the difference  between these two styles  refer to Chapter  ECG RESP Monitoring     For the  ALM SOUND  item  you can set the alarm volume to    ON    or    OFF      For the  NET TYPE  item  two selections are available  HYPER III and CMS     For the  LOCAL NET NO  item  it refers to the net No     A Note A    When using the monitor with wireless network module  do not change network bed  number freely  Contact the manufacturer in this case     A Warning A  When the alarm volume is set to    OFF     you will not hear the alarm sound if new alarm  occurs  Therefore  you must be very careful in using this selection     If setting the alarm volume to    OFF    when the system is in Silence or Pause status  the  system will automatically discharge Silence or Pause status     If you select    Silence    or    Pause    when the alarm volume is set to    OFF     the system  will restore the alarm volume before the alarm volume is set to    
189. may call up the   dialog box as the default one      ALARM VOL  The options are from    10    to    1        10    indicates the maximum volume while     1    the minimum      ALM REC TIME  which has three selections  8S  16S  32S      ALM PAUSE TIME  refers to the alarm suspension time span  which has three selections   1MIN  2MIN  3MIN      PARA ALM TYPE  which has two selections  LATCH  UNLATCH  LATCH refers to the  situation once alarm occurs  the system will alarm always until the intervention of the  operator  press SILENCE on the panel   UNLATCH refers to the situation that once the       Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  5 3    Alarm    alarm condition is discharged  the alarm will disappear automatically     Alarm setup of each parameter  In    ALARM SETUP    menu select    ALM SEL    item to set up the alarm information of following  parameters  They are HR  ST  PVC  SPO2  NIBP  IBP  1  2   RESP  TEMP  For example     Method to set up alarm information of HR   Step 1  Select    HR ALM SETUP    in    ALM SEL    item to call up the dialog box    ALARM  SETUP    for HR only   Step 2  Five items are available for the user to set up  which are HR ALM  on off of the alarm  switch   ALM LEV alarm level   ALM REC alarm recording switch   ALM HI  higher limit of HR  alarm   ALM LO  lower limit of HR alarm   When use the knob to select each item and press  the knob  a pull down list appears for the user to choose his desired selection   The method for setting the alarm 
190. method to remove clogs of this kind is        19 12 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     Anesthetic Gas Measurement    Step 1  as usual  check the entrance or the exit for clogs and remove them     Step 2  if occlusion still persist after step 1  you should consider the existence of interior  occlusion  In this situation  contact Mindray service engineer        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  19 13       Chapter 20 Accessories and Ordering  Information    This chapter lists the recommendation accessories used in this device     A Warning A    The accessories list below are specified to be used in this device of Shenzhen Mindray  Bio Medical Electronics Co   Ltd  The device will be possibly damaged or lead some    harm if any other accessories are used     20 1 ECG Accessories    H Cables    6PIN 3 core ECG cable  LL 2325TRONOMEDINC    5 lead ECG lead wire  LL 22305TRONOMED    6PIN 5 lead ECG cable  LL 2514TRONOM ED    6PIN 5 lead ECG cable  LL 2540AAMI    6PIN 5 lead ECG cable  EURO  KENDALL    6PIN 5 lead ECG cable and lead wires assembly  A   6PIN 5 lead ECG cable and lead wires assembly  IEC  Mindray   6PIN 3 lead ECG cable and lead wires assembly  AHA  Mindray   6PIN 3 lead ECG cable and lead wires assembly  IEC Mindray     6PIN 5 lead ECG cable and lead wires assembly  Deffibrilation   AHA  Mindray     6PIN 5 lead ECG cable and lead wires assembly  Deffibrilation   IEC  Mindray     6PIN 3 lead ECG cable and lead wires assembly  Deffibrilation   AHA  Mindray
191. mits     ST    Max  ST HI Min  ST LO Step  2 0 mv  2 0 mv 0 1       Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  12 13    ECG RESP Monitoring    m DEF POINT pick this item to access the DEF POINT window  in which the position of ISO  and ST point can be set up   o ISO Base point  Default is 78 ms   Oo ST Measurement point     DEF POINT       180 ST    Back to the upper menu    Figure 12 10 DEF POINT window    The operator can adjust the position of both ISO and ST measurement points   The reference point is the position where the peak of R wave locates  see Figure 12 11      R Wave      ST Value        78 ms  109 ms    Figure 12 11 DEF Point    The ST measurement for each beat complex is the vertical difference between the two  measurement points     AN Note AY    the ST measurement point should be adjusted if the patient s HR or ECG morphology  changes significantly     o Adjusting ISO  ST       12 14 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     ECG RESP Monitoring    These two points can be adjusted turning the knob    When adjusting ST measurement point  the system will show the ST Measurement Point  Window  The QRS complex template displays in the window  lf the template is not established   a horizontal line will display  If the channel is not at ON position  a horizontal line will also  display   It is adjustable of the highlight bar in the window  You may select ISO or ST  then  switch the knob left or right to move the cursor line  When the cursor is at the required  positio
192. mmediately     16 3 Monitoring Procedure    Preparation before IBP measurement   10 Plug the pressure cable into corresponding socket and check that the monitor is switched  on              20  Any entrapped air should be removed from the pressure system  pressure line and  transducer  by filling with normal saline                 30 Connect the arterial catheter to the pressure line  ensure any entrapped air removed        AY Warning A    If any entrapped air in pressure system  re fill system with normal saline        16 2 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     IBP Monitoring    AT Position the transducer at the same level of the patient   s heart  approximately mid axillary  line    HI Ensure the correct label name has been selected  Refer to the next section for details    6   Zero the transducer  Refer to the next section for details        _ A    _           y  Leg l iV NAN  Normal Saline   if o  Ki  Y ith Te if 7 Pressure    F     Transducer  PA IP    j  f j  L j L a PATIENT  a HA     d j wee r   MOHITOR  s A   Stopeok         Drip   Distal End j QI i     hamber   To Patient H  j        D       f 7    VW j    A  Aw A  Se    SQ    d  ff   NU  d LL Pressure    Transducer  Interface Cable       J     Sh ot    km d D  i  FH    Figure 16 1 IBP Monitoring    16 4 IBP Menu    Rotate the knob to move the cursor onto IBP hot key in the parameter area  press the knob to  popup    IBP 1 2  SELECT    menu shown as below  Pick the IBP SETUP to popup    IBP 1 2   SETUP    menu s
193. n  you may select the base point or the measurement point     A Note A    Abnormal QRS complex is not considered in ST segment analysis   ST Alarm Message    Note  The alarm limits for two ST measurements are identical  No setting of alarm limits can  be made only for one channel    Among physiological alarms  those belonging to the type that the parameter has exceeded  the limits may activate the recorder to automatically output the parameters and related  measured waveforms when the alarms occur on the condition that the alarm record switch in  the related menu is On    Tables below describe the possible physiological alarms  technical alarms and prompt  messages during ST measurement     Physiological alarms     Message Cause Alarm Level    ST1 TOO HIGH ST measuring value of channel 1 is    above the upper alarm limit  SSES       STITOO LOW ST measuring value of channel 1 is    ee r sel    below the lower alarm limit  User selectable       ST2 TOO HIGH ST measuring value of channel 2 is    above the upper alarm limit  weer selecienle       ST2 TOO LOW ST measuring value of channel 2 is    SL r sel    below the lower alarm limit  User selectable                   Technical alarms     Stop using ST alarming    STALMLMTERR   Functional safety failure HIGH     Mon  notify biomedical  engineer or Mindray    service staff           Prompt messages  include general alerts      Cause Alarm Level    ST measuring value of channel 1 exceeds the  measurement range           Message   
194. n Artery Pressure   mE LVD  Left Ventricular Diameter   m PA MAP  Mean Pulmonary Artery Pressure  E HT  Height   E WT  Weight    17 5 Alarm Information and Prompt    CO Alarm Message    Among physiological alarms  those belonging to the type that the parameter has exceeded  the limits may activate the recorder to automatically output the parameters and related  measured waveforms when the alarms occur on the condition that the alarm record switch in  the related menu is On     Tables below describe the possible physiological alarms  technical alarms and prompt  messages occurring during co measurement     Physiological alarms                                Message Cause Alarm Level  TB TOO HIGH E value is above upper alarm E  TB TOO LOW ere value is below lower alarm User selectable  Technical alarms   Alarm  Message Cause bevel Remedy  TB SENSOR TB measuring cable LOW Make sure that cable is properly  OFF falls off the monitor  connected   COINITERR CO module failure HIGH Stop using measuring function of CO  module  notify biomedical engineer or  CO INIT ERR1 Mindray service staff   CO INIT ERR2  CO INIT ERR3  CO INIT ERR4  CO INIT ERR5  CO INIT ERR6  CO INIT ERR7          Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  17 9    CO Measuring             CO INIT ERR8  CO module failure or Stop using measuring function of CO  CO COMM e ee    communication HIGH module  notify biomedical engineer or  STOP  failure Mindray service staff   CO module failure or Stop using measuring function
195. n all  circumstance the monitor must be connected to a grounded AC power supply  The  monitor is referred to as an IEC 601 F device in the summary of situations table  contained in IEC 601 1 1     A Warning A    Dispose of the packaging material  observing the applicable waste control regulations  and keeping it out of children   s reach     A Warning A    This equipment is accord with the standard CISPR11 EN55011  class A     A Warning A   Grounding    Connect the monitor only to a three wire  grounded  hospital grade receptacle  The  three conductor plug must be inserted into a properly wired three wire receptacle  if a  three wire receptacle is not available  a qualified electrician must install one in  accordance with the governing electrical code    Do not under any circumstances remove the grounding conductor from the power  plug    Do not use extension cords or adapters of any type  The power cord and plug must be  intact and undamaged        1 2 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     Introduction    If there is any doubt about the integrity of the protective earth conductor arrangement   operate the monitor on internal battery power until the AC power supply protective  conductor is fully functional     A Note A    The software was developed per IEC601 1 4  The possibility of hazards arising from  errors in the software program is minimized     A Caution A    At the end of its service life  the product described in this manual  as well as its  accessories  must be
196. n processed real signals  In  Monitor or Sugery mode  ECG waveforms may have distortion of different extent  In  either of the latter two modes  the system can only show the basic ECG and the results  of ST analysis may also be greatly affected  In Surgery mode  results of ARR analysis  may be somewhat affected  Therefore  it is suggested that in the environment having  relative small interference  you   d better monitor a patient in Diagnosis mode           Leads of channel 2  refer to for detailed information   O0 Waveform gain of channel 2  refer to for detailed information     AN Note A    Pacemaking signal detected is marked by a     above the ECG waveform                                   12 5 ECG Menu    ECG SETUP Menu    Pick the ECG hot key on the screen  and the following menu will popup        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  12 7    ECG RESP Monitoring    ECG SETUP    HR ALM ON v HR CHANNEL CH1      ALM LEV MED v LEAD TYPE 5 LEADS      ALM REC OFF v SWEEP 25 0 Z  ALM HI 120 Ka ST ANALYSIS  gt  gt   ALM LU 50  gt  ARR ANALYSIS  gt  gt     HR FROM ECG z OTHER SETUP  gt  gt     Access the sub menu in which more items  can be set     EXIT    Figure 12 6 ECG SETUP menu    ECG alarm setting   e HR ALM  pick  ON  to enable prompt message and data record during the ECG alarm   pick  OFF  to disable the alarm function  and there will be a 28 beside    ECG       e ALM LEV  selectable from HIGH  MED  LOW  Level HIGH represents the most serious  case    e ALM REC  pick
197. n thumb and forefinger     16 7 6 Cleaning and sterilization    A Warning A   Do not autoclave   A Warning A   Do not use radiation sterilization  A Warning A   Do not use ultrasonic cleaning  A Warning A   Do not use chlorinated hydrocarbons  A Warning A   Do not use toluene   A Warning A    Do not use sodium hypochlorite solution    A Note A    The ICT B is supplied non sterile  It must be cleaned and sterilised before each use     Inspect for cuts or damage to silicone coating before immersing in any liquid  Be careful not to  get liquid on the connector pins or inside the connector via the luer fitting    Wash the catheter with soap solution being careful not to poke the sensing area  Do not use  synthetic detergents or oil based soaps as this may result in a foreign body reaction     Transducers may be cleaned gently with alcohol wipes  Do not soak in alcohol     Sterilisation is by means of cold aqueous solutions of detergicide  e g  Cidex   formalin or by  ethylene oxide gas     AY Warning A  Do not use the sterilizing cap during ETO gas sterilizing     A Note A    Immediately after removal of the catheter from the patient  Checking for cuts in the  silicone rubber     Use a 1ml syringe to inject 0 5cc of air into the luer and immerse the catheter in water  If small  bubbles are seen from any part of the catheter or tip  wipe dry and sterilize  Return to       Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  16 19    IBP Monitoring    Manufactory for repair     A Note A    It i
198. nction  notify biomedical                      EECH failure SE engineer or Mindray service  staff    m ARRRELEARN Pick this item to start a learning procedure    m ARRALARM Pick this item to access the ARR ALARM dialog box to set    arrhythmia alarm parameters   Set ALM to ON OFF to enable disable the alarm function  Set REC to ON OFF to  enable disable alarm record function  turn the knob under LEV column to set alarm level  to HIGH  MED or LOW     ARR ALARM    ALM LEV REC  ASYSTOLE ON v  HIGH   OFF    UFIBVVTAC ON   HIGH   OFF      R ON T ON   MED   OFF   ALL ALM ON  UT gt 2 ON   MED   OFF    COUPLET ON   MED   OFF   ALL ALM OFF  PUC ON   MED   OFF      BIGEMINY ON   MED   OFF v  ALL REC ON  TRIGEMINY ON   MED   OFF      TACHY ON   MED   OFF v  ALL REC OFF  BRADY ON   MED   OFF     PNC o dio   cere  e   PNP o   ome   oo    P S    MISSED BEATS ON   MED   OFF      Open or close the ASYSTOLE alarm     EXIT    Figure 12 13 ARR ALARM Menu       Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  12 17    ECG RESP Monitoring    You can pick ALL ALM ON to enable alarm function of all arrhythmia types and pick ALL ALM  OFF to disable this function  Likewise  you can pick ALL REC ON to enable recording function  for all arrhythmia types and pick ALL REC OFF to disable this function  Changing the ALM  LEV can reset alarm level of all arrhythmia types to the same value   m ARRRECALL Pick this item to review and edit the ARR analysis result    The latest arrhythmia events  up to 60  are displayed 
199. ng    The monitor prints out the selected waveforms under the FREEZE mode  In this way you can  snap the abnormal waveforms on the screen and record it     Trend Graph   Table Recording    The monitor can print out the trend graph and table in the current TREND GRAPH or TREND  TABLE window     Arrhythmia Review Recording  The monitor can print out the alarm Arrhythmia event in the current ARR RECALL window   Alarm Review Recording    The monitor can print out the alarm events include waves and parameters in the current  ALARM RECALL window     NIBP Review Recording   The monitor can print out all the NIBP review events in NIBP RECALL window   CO Measurement Curve Recording   The monitor can print out CO Measurement curve in WINDOWS FOR CO MEASUREMENT   Hemodynamic Calculation result recording   The monitor can print out parameters and results in HEMOD WINDOWS   Monitor Information   The monitor can print out messages in the current STATUS window    Titration Table   The monitor can print out the messages in the current TITRATION window   Notes on Recording    H Recording texts   Real time Report  Periodic Report  Para Alarm Report  XXX  name of the alarm parameter   Arrhythmia Report  XXX  Arrhythmia type   Freeze Wave Report  Trend Graph  Trend Table  Para Alarm Review  NIBP Test Review       Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  7 3    Recording    CO Test Curve   HEMOCAL PARAMETERS   Status Report   Titration Table   Alarm parameters  alarm time and freeze time   Patient
200. ns in the light absorbance signal are  caused by oscillations in the arterial blood volume  This assumes that the blood flow in the  region of the sensor passes entirely through the capillary bed rather than through any  arterio venous shunts  The traditional pulse oximeter calculates the ratio of pulsatile  absorbance  AC  to the mean absorbance  DC  at each of two wavelengths  660 nm and 940  nm        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  13 1    SpO2 Monitoring    S 660    AC 660  DC 660   S 940    AC 940  DC 940     This traditional instrument then calculates the ratio of these two arterial pulse added  absorbance signals     R   S 660  S 940     This value of R is used to find the saturation SpOz in a look up table built into the instrument   s  software  The values in the look up table are based upon human blood studies against a  laboratory co oximeter on healthy adult volunteers in induced hypoxia studies     This MS 7 assumes that arterio venous shunting is highly variable and that fluctuating  absorbance by venous blood is the major component of noise during the pulse  The MS 7  decomposes S 660  and S 940  into an arterial signal plus a noise component and calculates  the ratio of the arterial signals without the noise     S 660    S1   N1   S 940    S2   N2   R  1 S2  Again  R is the ratio of two arterial pulse added absorbance signals and its value is used to  find the saturation SpOz in an empirically derived equation into the software  The values in the  emp
201. ns out  jovi Insert a new roll of  PAPER record paper   RECORDER COMM Operating status error   Reset the recorder   ow  ERR  RECORDER PAPER Recording continuously for iow Re insert paper   JAM more than 30m  RECORDER The recorder is in iw Wait for the completion  INITIALIZING initialization process  of initialization  TOO MANY REC Too many alarm events eer Send recording order  TASKS take place simultaneously  after a while   RECORDER PAPER The paper is in wrong iw Insert the record paper  W P  position  again   In the status of printing out Wait for the completion  RECORDER BUSY low of printing out  Recorder stops working  Gives recording order  after the recorder  REC NOT AVAILABLE Low restores to the normal  status or the failure is  removed   The voltage of the Stop recording until the  RECORDER NET recorder is too high  Low recorder restores normal  HIGH  status   The voltage of the Stop recording until the  RECORDER VLT LOW recorder is too low  Low recorder restores normal  status   RECORDER S  COMM Unrecoverable serial port L Shut down the monitor  SE OW   E  ERR communication error  and re start it again   RECORDER Possibly caused a the i Reset the recorder   SELFTEST ERR RAM  ROM  CPU or ow  WATCHDOG   Error occurs during Shutdown and re start  RECORDER INIT ERR initialization low  RECORDER INIT Error occurs during etc Shutdown and re start  ERR1 initialization  RECORDER INIT Error occurs during b   Shutdown and re start  ERR2 initialization  RECORDER INIT Error occu
202. nsor  Sensitivity  Impedance   Resolution   Accuracy   Actualization interval    2 14 CO    Method  Measuring range    25 to 240   5BPM    1   1    2   0   50  C   0 1  C    0 1  C  0   50   C exclusive of probe errors   about 1 Sec      lt  10  Sec      2  ART  PA  CVP  RAP  LAP  ICP  P1  P2    0   300 mmHg   6   120 mmHg   10   40 mmHg   50   300 mmHg    D  uV V mmHg    300   3000  Ohm    1 mmHg    2  or  1mmHg  use the greater  about 1 Sec      Thermodilution Technique       Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     CO   TB   Tl  Resolution   CO   TB TI  Accuracy   CO   TB   TI  Calculation  Alarm Range    2 15 CO2    Method  Measuring mode    Production Specification    0 1   20  L min   23   43    C   0   27    C     0 1  L min   0 1    C      5  or   0 1L min    0 1    C     0 1    C    CO  Hemodynamic Calculation  23 43    C     Infra red Absorbation Technique  Sidestream or Mainstream  optional     Side stream mode sampling gas flow rate    Measuring range  CO2  INS CO   AwRR  Resolution  CO   INS CO   AwRR  Accuracy  CO     AwRR  Actualization interval  Start up Time    Mainstream Response Time  Sidestream Rise Time    Sidestream Delay Time    Alarm range    100  150  200 ml min  option     0 99 mmHg  0 99 mmHg  0 150 bpm    1 mmHg  1mmHg  1 bpm        2 mmHg 0   40 mmHg  41   76 mmHg  77   99 mmHg                 5  of reading   10  of reading   2 bpm   about 1 Sec                            lt  30 sec typical in sidestream mode    lt  80 seconds in mainstream mode
203. nt     Physiological alarms   Message Cause Alarm Level    IS1 TOO HIGH SYS measuring value of channel 1 is above    hie User selectable  upper alarm limit        IS1 TOO LOW SYS measuring value of channel 1 is below    Ge User selectable  lower alarm limit        ID1 TOO HIGH DIA measuring value of channel 1 is above    ee User selectable  upper alarm limit        ID1 TOO LOW DIA measuring value of channel 1 is below    SC r sel    lower alarm limit  User selectable          Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  16 9    IBP Monitoring                                                                   IM1 TOO HIGH MAP measuring value of channel 1 is above User selectable  upper alarm limit   IM1 TOO LOW MAP measuring value of channel 1 is below Userselectabie  lower alarm limit   IS2 TOO HIGH SYS measuring value of channel 2 is above   ser sdlectable  upper alarm limit   IS2 TOO LOW SYS measuring value of channel 2 is below User selectable  lower alarm limit   ID2 TOO HIGH DIA measuring value of channel 2 is above Userselectabi    upper alarm limit   ID2 TOO LOW DIA measuring value of channel 2 is below User selectable  lower alarm limit   IM2 TOO HIGH MAP measuring value of channel 2 is above   ser selectabie  upper alarm limit   IM2 TOO LOW MAP measuring value of channel 2 is below   s  rselectable  lower alarm limit   Technical alarms   Message Cause E Remedy  IBP cable of channel Make sure that cable is properly  IBP1 SENSOR OFF 1 falls off from LOW connected   monitor  
204. ntly near   able to zero it but not obtain    zero mmHg  actual ICP readings        We read negative  ICP but get good          Not proper zeroing        The ICT B cannot read negative  pressure  Rezero the monitor       16 22    Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4           IBP Monitoring       waveforms on the  monitor     transducer combination  Make  sure that you are not plugging the  female luer during readings           The waveform on  the monitor makes  large cyclical  swings       If you are using a respirator or  some device that applies  pressure even indirectly it may  affect ICP  The transducer is  responding normally by  showing this accurately                Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  16 23       Chapter 17 CO Measuring    17 1 General    mM The Cardiac Output CO  measurement is performed by using thermodilution method    m The PM 9000 Portable Patient Monitor can determine blood temperature  measure  cardiac output  and perform hemodynamic calculations    mM You can have iced injectate using either the flow through system or individual syringes of  injectate    mM You can perform up to six measurements before editing the average cardiac output  C O    and cardiac index  C I      E Prompt message on the screen will tell you when to inject     17 2 Monitoring Procedure    17 2 1 C O  Measurement Procedure       Plug the C O  interface cable into the C O  socket in the front panel    2  Attach the injectate probe connector and catheter thermistor
205. o get familiar with the equipment and make the best out of it     Following symbols indicates some important facts that you have to pay special attention to   A Warning A Points to be noted to avoid injury to the patient and the operator   A Caution A Points to be noted to avoid damage to the equipment     A Note A Points to be noted     This manual is intended for persons who are trained in the use of this field and have adequate    experience in operation of monitoring equipment        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  V    Content    Content    Chapter 1   Introducton             ccccsecesseeeeeseeeeeeeenseeeeneeeessaaeeeseeeeeseeeseaeseseaesaseaeenseeeseaesaseaeeeeaes 1 1  1 1 General Information    1 3  1 2 Sereen  Display EE 1 5  433   Buton FUNCONS eisa e AEE E AAE ESSEE EEEE 1 8  ER Blue 1 10  125   Bun Battery EE 1 14  Chapter 2 Getting Started           csecccsseceseeesseeeeseeeeeseeeseaeseeseeeenseeeseaeseseeeseseeeenseeessaeseseaneneees 2 1  2 1 Open the Package and Check  2 1  2 2 Connect the Power Cales  2 1  2 3 Power On the Monitor cece ee eee eae aaaeeeeeeeeeseeaaaaeeeeeeeeeseeenneeeeeeeeeeee 2 2  2 4 Connect Patient Gensors nest ttn rnnt tnnnnttn anatta nnntnn ananman nenn nnn 2 3  25 Check the R  cordet eeir uere kieten EEEREN K AARAA AEn ESERE AE EAR SERRATE RAN Ed 2 3  Chapter 3 System Menu      sss sssnsesnseunneunneunneunnnunnnnnnnnnnnnunnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnne nnnn annene nnana 3 1  3 1 Patient Information Getup    3 1  32 Defaut e EE 3 3
206. onnection of IBP2  correctly  sensor      IBP1 NEED ZERO CAL     Zero calibrating must be done  before measuring in IBP1    Do zero calibrating for IBP1        IBP2 NEED ZERO CAL     Zero calibrating must be done  before measuring in IBP2    Do zero calibrating for IBP2        TB SENSOR OFF     TB sensor is not connected  correctly     Check the connection of TB  sensor            CO2 SENSOR OFF        CO2 sensor is not connected  correctly        Check the connection of CO2  sensor           Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4        System Alarm Prompt        ECG NOISE      XX INIT ERR X     Rather large interference  signals appear in the ECG  signals     XX has  initialization     error X during        XX COMM STOP     XX cannot communicate with  the host         XX COMM ERR     XX cannot communicate  normally with the host     Check the connection of ECG  lead wire  Check the current  situation of the patient  Check  if the patient moves a lot     Re start up the monitor or  re plug in out the module  If  the error still exists  contact  the manufacturer        XX represents all the paramete    r modules in the system such as ECG     NIBP  SpO2  IBP  CO module  etc         XX ALM LMT ERR     The alarm limit of XX  parameter is modified by  chance     Contact the manufacturer for  repair         XX RANGE EXCEEDED     The measured value of XX  parameter has exceeded the  measuring range of the  system     Contact the manufacturer for  repair        XX represents the par
207. or not fully inserted into  the connector     Sensor inserted upside down     May be an incorrect sensor   or a defective sensor or cable   Insert sensor into the  connector  Disconnect and  reconnect sensor  Refer to the  instructions for the sensor  being used     Disconnect and reconnect he  sensor with the logos  matching        SpO2 SENSOR    SpO2 sensor may _ be  disconnected from the patient    Disconnect and reconnect the  sensor                       Orr or the monitor  Reattach sensor   Stop using the measuring  SpO2 SENSOR This message appears when   function of SpO2 module   FAULT the sensor is faulty notify biomedical engineer or  our service staff   SpO2   Make sure that the monitor  UNRECOGNIZED aua e S   and the patient are in correct  SENSOR g b connection with the cables   SpO2 This message is displayed   Make sure that the monitor          Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  3       System Alarm Prompt                         INCOMPATIBLE when the masimo sensor is   use incompatible sensor   SENSOR finding incompatible sensor   SpO02 Outside signal or energy d    INTERFERENCE preventing reading  ee  If values are not displayed  within 30 seconds  disconnect  SpO2 PULSE Unit is searching for the   and reconnect sensor  If pulse  SEARCH patients pulse  search continues  remove  sensor and replace on a  better perfused site   SpO2 LOW Signal too small Move sensor to better  PERFUSTION 9   perfused site   Too much light on   Remove or reduce lighting   MUCH
208. otential Grounding    Protection class 1 instruments are already included in the protective grounding  protective  earth  system of the room by way of grounding contacts in the power plug  For internal  examinations on the heart or the brain  the PM 9000 Portable Patient Monitor must have a  separate connection to the equipotential grounding system  One end of the equipotential  grounding cable  potential equalization conductor  is connected to the equipotential grounding  terminal on the instrument rear panel and the other end to one point of the equipotential  grounding system  The equipotential grounding system assumes the safety function of the  protective grounding conductor if ever there is a break in the protective grounding system   Examinations in or on the heart  or brain  should only be carried out in medically used rooms  incorporating an equipotential grounding system  Check each time before use that the  instrument is in perfect working order  The cable connecting the patient to the instrument must  be free of electrolyte     A Warning A  If the protective grounding  protective earth  system is doubtful  the monitor must be  supplied by inner power only     Condensation    Make sure that during operation  the instrument is free of condensation  Condensation can  form when equipment is moved from one building to another  thus being exposed to moisture  and differences in temperature     A Warning A    Possible explosion hazard if used in the presence of flammable
209. other than domestic and those directly connected to  Emissions IEC the public low voltage power supply network that  Voltage supplies buildings used for domestic purposes  Fluctuations    Flicker Class A  Emissions IEC   61000 3 3   TABLE 2    Guidance and manufacturer   s declaration     electromagnetic immunity       The monitor is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below  The  customer or the user of the monitor should assure that it is used in such an environment           Immunity test IEC 60601 Compliance level Electromagnetic  Test level environment     guidance                   Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  1          EMC            7 SEN  2KV   4KV      Floors should be ace    contac concrete or ceramic tile   a ES ev contact floors are covered with  ENEE EE x   pte mata te clave  D fe  7 6KV    8KV air 30   air WW  Electrical fast Mains power quality should be  Transient burst Se Gg power     okV that of a typical commercial or  IEC 61000 4 4 SUPP nes hospital environment   Surge Seen PE  1kV Mains power quality should be  EC E  2 kV that of a typical commercial or    Seng hospital environment     mode       Voltage dips  Short     lt 5  Ur   gt 95   dip in Ur  for 0 5  cycle    40  Ur  60  dip     lt 5  Ur   gt 95  dip  in Ur   for 0 5  cycle    Mains power quality should be  that of a typical commercial or  hospital environment  If the       interruptions and   in Uy  for 5 cycle   40  Ur   60  dip   user of the monitor requir
210. pO2 numeric shows the    percentage of hemoglobin molecules which have combined with oxygen molecules to form    oxyh  pleth    emoglobin  The SpO2 PLETH parameter can also provide a pulse rate signal and a  ysmogram wave     How the SpO2   PLETH Parameter Works    A    Puls    Arterial oxygen saturation is measured by a method called pulse oximetry  It is a  continuous  non invasive method based on the different absorption spectra of reduced  hemoglobin and oxyhemoglobin  It measures how much light  sent from light sources on  one side of the sensor  is transmitted through patient tissue  such as a finger or an ear    to a receiver on the other side    The sensor measurement wavelengths are nominally 660nm for the Red LED and  940nm for Infrared LED  Maximum optical power output for LED is 4 mW    The amount of light transmitted depends on many factors  most of which are constant   However  one of these factors  the blood flow in the arteries  varies with time  because it  is pulsating  By measuring the light absorption during a pulsation  it is possible to derive  the oxygen saturation of the arterial blood  Detecting the pulsation gives a PLETH  waveform and pulse rate signal    The SpO  value and the PLETH waveform can be displayed on the main screen    SPO2 is a non invasive measurement of the functional oxygen saturation     Warning A    e oximetry can overestimate the GpO  value in the presence of Hb CO  Met Hb or    dye dilution chemicals     SpO2   Pulse Monitoring  
211. perating in  the Spectrum24 Network    Amber indicates Spectrum24 Radio traffic  detected        Wired LAN Attached   green    In Use  amber     A green LED indicates a connection   between the CB 1000 and the wiredEthernet   Lights amber to indicate activity is detected on  the wired Ethernet        Serial Activity Transmit    LP   green      Receive  amber              A green LED indicates the CB 1000 is receiving  data through the serial port and displays amber  when the CB 1000 is transmitting data through  theserial port        AN Note A    Monitor must be connected with specific network equipment such as Harb during    using net function     A Warning A    Through network interface only MINDRAY Clinical Information Center can be    connected in        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  1 13       Introduction    A Warning A   Accessory equipment connected to the analog and digital interfaces must be certified  according to the respective IEC standards  e g  IEC 60950 for data processing  equipment and IEC 60601 1 for medical equipment   Furthermore all configurations  shall comply with the valid version of the system standard IEC 60601 1 1  Everybody  who connects additional equipment to the signal input part or signal output part  configures a medical system  and is therefore responsible that the system complies  with the requirements of the valid version of the system standard IEC 60601 1 1  If in  doubt  consult the technical service department or your local re
212. perly  LOOSE CUFF wrapped or no cuff LOW Properly wrap the cuff  exists   Cuff  hose or Check and replace the leaking parts   AIR LEAK connector is LOW if required  notify biomedical  damaged  engineer or Mindray service staff   Stable pressure value Check if the hoses are tangled  if  AR oE is not available  e g  LOW failure persists  notify biomedical  hoses are tangled  engineer or Mindray service staff   Cuff is too loose or  WEAK SIGNAL patient pulse is too LOW Use other method to measure blood  Weak  pressure   Reset NIBP module  if failure  RANGE Measuring range persists  stop using measuring  EXCEEDED exceeds the specified HIGH function of NIBP module  notify  upper limit  biomedical engineer or Mindray  service staff   Affected by arm  EXCESSIVE motion  signal noise is LOW Make sure that the patient under  MOTION too large or pulse rate monitoring is motionless   is not regular   Pressure has Measure again  if failure persists   exceeded the stop using measuring function of  OVER PRESSURE specified upper safety HIGH NIBP module and notify biomedical  limit  engineer or Mindray service staff   SIGNAL          STURATED Excessive motion LOW Stop the patient from moving   Durin he  matie Check and replace the leaking parts   PNEUMATIC LEAK g P LOW if required  notify biomedical  test  leak is detected    f i engineer or Mindray service staff   Operation of blood Stop using measuring function of  a e pressure pump HIGH NIBP module  notify biomedical  system is failed  eng
213. ppened  our service staff        Prompt message  include general alerts            Message Cause Alarm Level  SpO2 EXCEED SpO2 measuring value exceeds the range  HIGH  PR EXCEED PR measuring value exceeds the range  HIGH  SEARCH PULSE SpO2 module is searching for pulse  No alarm  SpO2 module cannot detect SpO2 signal for a  NO PULSE long time  HIGH                   13 1 5 Masimo Information    The MASIMO SET   Product    Ihas El    Masimo Patents    This device is covered under one or more the following U S  Patents  5 482 036  5 490 505   5 632 272  5 685 299  5 758 644  5 769 785  6 002 952  6 036 642  6 067 462  6 206 830   6 157 850 and international equivalents  U S A  and international patents pending     No Implied License    Possession or purchase of this device does not convey any express or implied license to use  the device with replacement parts which would  alone  or in combination with this device  fall  within the scope of one or more of the patents relating to this device        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  13 13    SpO2 Monitoring    13 2 PART 2 MINDRAY SpO2 board configuration     13 2 1 What is SpO2 Monitoring    SpO2 Plethysmogram measurement is employed to determine the oxygen saturation of    hemoglobin in the arterial blood  If  for example  97  hemoglobin molecules in the red blood    cells    of the arterial blood combine with oxygen  then the blood has a SpOz oxygen saturation    of 97   The SpOz numeric on the monitor will read 97  The S
214. presentative     1 5 Built in Battery       PM 9000 Portable Patient Monitor is equipped with a rechargeable battery  Figure 1 7                   The battery in the Monitor can automatically recharge when connected to AC INPUT until it is  full  A symbol    cam    is displayed on the lower left quarter of the screen to indicate the status of  recharging  in which the CYAN part represents the relative electric energy of the battery  This  symbol will be covered when some information appears  And  if the battery is not installed in  PM 9000  battery state will be displayed as    aa    under a cross to indicate that no battery is  available    There are two battery slots inside PM 9000  each can hold a battery  and one battery can  support PM 9000 working  Battery can be installed into and pulled off from battery slot  Under  connectors to patient cables there are battery slots with cover  See Figure 1 7 Battery Slot  Cover     A Warning A    Don   t pull off battery when the monitor is working     When operating on battery  the monitor will prompt alarm and shut off automatically when the  energy is low  When the electric energy is going out  the monitor will sound continuous level 1  alarm beeping and display    BATTERY LOW    in the Message Area  Connect the monitor to AC  power at this moment can recharge the battery while operating  If keep operating on the  battery  the monitor will shut off automatically  more than 5 minutes since alarming  upon  exhaustion of the batter
215. probe  Socket for channel 2 TEMP probe  Socket for channel 1 IBP transducer  Socket for channel 2 IBP transducer  Socket for ECG cable   Socket for Cardiac Output   Socket for NIBP cuff   Socket for Spo2 Sensor       Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     Introduction    Ee EI   cE EI       Figure 1 5 Left Side    AN This symbol means    BE CAREFUL   Refer to the manual        KA Indicates that the instrument is IEC 60601 1 Type CF equipment  The unit displaying  this symbol contains an F Type isolated  floating  patient applied part providing a high degree  of protection against shock  and is suitable for use during defibrillation        Figure 1 6 Rear Panel  RW Power Supply  100 250  VAC   50 60  Hz    Socket  J    m VGA MONITOR   Socket       Monitor interface for external standard VGA color monitor        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  1 11    Introduction    Appliance    1  Install the VGA monitor in the same room with the patient but keep away from the  patient for more than 1 5m  The monitor is intended to be used as an assistant  monitoring device    2  Plug and insert the connection cable while the VGA monitor is in power off status    3  Power on at the same time  or power on the PM 9000 patient monitor after VGA    4  Adjust brightness and contrast properly     C C  Socket         Equipotential grounding terminal for connection with the hospital   s grounding system   m AUX OUTPUT  socket       This port is used for both Analog Output and NURSE CALL  
216. r area indicating that the  system has started performing pneumatic test    5  The system will automatically Inflate the pneumatic system to about 180mmHg    6  After 20 seconds or so  the system will automatically open the deflating valve  which  marks the completion of a pneumatic measurement    7  no prompt appears on the bottom of the NIBP parameter area  it indicates that the  airway is in good situation and no air leaks exist  However if the prompt    PNEUMATIC  LEAK    appears in the place  it indicates that the airway may have air leaks  In this case   the user should check for loose connection  After confirming secure connections  the  user should re perform the pneumatic test  If the failure prompt still appears  please  contact the manufacturer for repair         monitor  cylinder    Cuff       Figure 14 4 Diagram of NIBP air leakage test    14 4 NIBP Alarm Message    Among physiological alarms  those belonging to the type that the parameter has exceeded  the limits may activate the recorder to automatically output the parameters and related  measured waveforms when the alarms occur on the condition that the alarm record switch in  the related menu is On    Tables below describe the possible physiological alarms  technical alarms and prompt  messages occurring during NIBP measurement     Physiological alarms                    Message Cause Alarm Level   NS TOO HIGH NIBP SYS measuring value User selectable  is above upper alarm limit   NIBP SYS measuring value   NS
217. rate of the  AG module is  lt 20ml min   which exceeds 1 second     AG module  communication failure     has       AG HARDWARE ERROR    AG module has hardware  failure        AG DATA LIMIT ERROR    AG module failure       AG USA ERROR    AG module failure       AG ZREF FAIL    AG module fails to zero        AG CAL FAIL    AG module fails to calibrate        FiCO2 ALM LMT ERR    Functional safety failure       EtCO2 ALM LMT ERR    Functional safety failure       FiO2 ALM LMT ERR    Functional safety failure       EtO2 ALM LMT ERR    Functional safety failure       FiN20 ALM LMT ERR    Functional safety failure       EtN2O ALM LMT ERR    Functional safety failure       FiAA ALM LMT ERR    Functional safety failure       EtAA ALM LMT ERR    Functional safety failure          AwRR ALM LMT ERR       Functional safety failure          Maintenance and Cleaning    of  the    Anesthetic Gas  Measurement    in this operation  manual     Check the connection of each   part and the patient situation   Measure again  if the failure  still exists  contact the  manufacturer for repair           Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  9       P N  9200 20 10499    
218. recorder becomes  cool  use the recorder for  output again  If the failure still       exists  contact the  manufacturer for repair    REC HEAD IN WRONG   The handle for pressing the   Press down the recorder    POSITION     paper is not pressed down     handle for pressing the paper         RECORDER OUT OF  PAPER     No paper is in the recorder     Place the paper into the  recorder               RECORDER PAPER   The paper in the recorder is   Place the recorder correctly  JAM  jammed  and try again     RECORDER COMM In the recorder setup menu    ERR  execute the function of   clearing record task  The   The communication of the   function can make the host   recorder is abnormal  and the recorder connect     RECORDER S  COMM  ERR     again  If the failure still exists   contact the manufacturer for  repair         RECORDER  W P      PAPER    The paper roll of the recorder  is not placed in the correction  position     Place the paper roll in the  correct position            REC NOT AVAILABLE        Cannot communicate with the  recorder        In the recorder setup menu     execute the function of  clearing record task  The  function can make the host  and the recorder connect    again  If the failure still exists   contact the manufacturer for       Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  7       System Alarm Prompt       repair            NIBP INIT ERR         NIBP SELFTEST ERR     NIBP initialization error    Execute the reset program in  the NIBP menu  If the failure  st
219. rence manometer with an error less than 0 8 mmHg and a ball pump  by means of a T piece connector and hoses to the pneumatic system  Set the monitor in  CALIBRATE mode  Inflate the pneumatic system to 0  50 and 200 mmHg by ball pump  separately  The difference between the indicated pressure of the reference manometer and  the indicated pressure of the monitor will not exceed 3 mmHg  Otherwise  please contact our  customer service     monitor  Reference  Manometer       Ball Pump Metal Vessel       Figure 14 3 Diagram of NIBP calibration    m PNEUMATIC  This item is used for air leakage test  Turn the knob to pick the item to start the air  leakage test  Then the item will change into STOP PENUM  which if picked  the system  will stop air leakage test     A warning A    This pneumatic test other than being specified in the EN 1060 1 standard is to be used  by the user to simply determine whether there are air leaks in the NIBP airway  If at the  end of the test the system gives the prompt that the NIBP airway has air leaks  please  contact the manufacturer for repair     Procedure of the air leakage test   1  Connect the cuff securely with the socket for NIBP air hole   2  Wrap the cuff around the cylinder of an appropriate size        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  14 7    NIBP Monitoring    3  Access the NIBP SETUP menu    4  Turn the knob to the PNEUMATIC item and press the knob  Then the prompt    Pneum  testing       will appear on the bottom of the NIBP paramete
220. rent compensate operations as per the selection of the  user  The selections are GENERAL  O2  N2O DES and ALL  Work conditions for  calculating compensate are shown in following table  Here is the operation method  First   select the gas compensates to be used  including general compensate  O2 compensate   Desf compensate and full compensates  Then  determine whether to make VA  compensate and BTPS compensate    Work Conditions for CO  Calculation Compensate              Calculation O2 Modification N20 Desflurane Work Conditions  Compensate Method Modification  General OFF OFF O2 lt  60    no N20  02 ON OFF O2 gt 50    no N20  Desflurance OFF ON O2 lt  60    amp N20    Desflurane  12   Full ON ON O2 gt 60   amp  N20       H WATERVAPOR  determine whether to make watervapor compensate   Water vapor compensation accounts for the effect of water vapor on the CO2  IR Infra Red  absorption characteristics  It is used in both mainstream and sidestream  measurement modes  The user may disable this compensation under certain situations   During normal sidestream operation  CO2 measurements are adjusted mathematically  to compensation for this effect   The host may choose to disable this compensation when performing dry gas  meaasurements in which the gas does not contain water vapor Dry gas procedures may  include steady state measurements and calibration procedures Steady state  measurements are performed only when background CO2 or CO2 present in the  immediate environment is measur
221. rically  at ST1 and ST2 in the Parameter Area  The trend can be viewed with table or graphic  form    Measurement unit of ST segment  mv    Measurement symbol of ST segment        elevating        depressing    Measurement range of ST segment   2 0 mv      2 0 mv     Pick the ST ANALYSIS item in the ECG SETUP menu to access the ST ANALYSIS sub menu  as shown below     ST ANALYSIS menu    ST ANAL   OFF M ALM HI 0 20    ST ALM OFF   ALM LO  0 20        gt     ALM LEY MED   DEF POINT  gt  gt   ALM REC OFF      Perform the ST analysis only when  switch is On     EXIT    Figure 12 9 ST ANALYSIS menu    ST analysis alarm setting    ST ANAL  the switch for ST analysis  Set it to ON to activate the ST analysis or OFF to  disable the ST analysis    ST ALM  pick  ON  to enable prompt message and data record during the ST analysis  alarm  pick  OFF  to disable the alarm function  and there will be a 4 amp  beside ST  ST  alarm is activated when the result exceeds set ST HI value or falls below ST LO value   ALM LEV  used to set up the ST alarm level  There are three selections  HIGH  MED and  LOW    ALM REC  pick  ON  to enable report printing upon ST analysis alarm    ALM HI  used to set up the upper limit of ST alarm  The max  higher limit is 2 0  The  minimum higher limit is 0 2 larger than the set lower limit    ALM LOW  used to set up the lower limit of ST alarm  The minimum lower limit is    2 0   The max  lower limit is 0 2 lower than the set higher limit     ST analysis alarm li
222. rm limit     m FiAA ALM LO  used to adjust the lower alarm limit of FiAA  When the measured  value is smaller than FiAA lower alarm limit  the    FiAA LOW    message is  displayed on the screen  In the UNLATCH mode  this message disappears when  the measured value is above the lower alarm limit     H APNEAALM  used to set up the apnea alarm time     AN Note A    Never turn off APNEA alarm   When various alarms happen together  the screen only displays the alarm message of  the highest alarm level     19  3 3 ADJUST WAVE AMP menu    In the    AG SETUP    menu  select the    ADJUST WAVE AMP gt  gt     item to pop up the    ADJUST  WAVE AMP    menu as shown in the figure below     ADJUST WAVE AMP    COZ WAVE AMP 2    N20 WAVE AMP 2    02 WAVE AMP 2    AA WAVE AMP 2      Back to the upper menu      ESES     Figure 19 6 ADJUST WAVE AMP menu    CO2 WAVE AMP  used to adjust the display amplitude of CO waveform   N20 WAVE AMP  used to adjust the display amplitude of N O waveform    O2 WAVE AMP  used to adjust the display amplitude of O2 waveform    AA WAVE AMP  used to adjust the display amplitude of anesthetic waveform   H EXIT  used to exit this menu     19  3 4 DEFAULT menu    In the    AG SETUP    menu  select the    DEFAULT    item to pop up the    AG DEFAULT CONFIG     menu as shown in the figure below        19 8 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     Anesthetic Gas Measurement    AG DEFAULT CONFIG    FACTORY DEFAULT CONFIG  USER DEFAULT CONFIG    Back to the upper menu   
223. rom a 1ml syringe the  pressure in these tubes will be greater than the ICP being measured  The exact amount of air  is not critical  subject to the permitted maximum  When this air is injected  the pressure will  cause the balloon to be lifted from the surface of the sensor and the same pressure will be  applied to the back of the sensor  The strain gauge senses equal pressure above and below  which is equivalent to having zero pressure applied  Thus by injecting a small volume of air   one undeflects the pressure sensor and checks the zero of the transducer and amplifier     16 7 2 Cautions    A Note A    Gaeltec catheter tip pressure transducers are designed for use by trained physicians  practicing a specialized branch of medicine  Use of the transducers should be  restricted to those trained to perform the procedures     A Note A    All pressure transducers must be used with patient monitors which meet the current  safety standards for the country in which they are used and which are intended for use  with strain gauge pressure transducers  The PATIENT MONITOR must provide  electrical isolation between the transducer and any mains powered equipment to which  the monitor is connected        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  16 13    IBP Monitoring    A Warning A  Disconnect the catheter from the monitor before defibrillation or electrosurgery   A Warning A    Do not plug the female luer on the proximal end of the catheter during ethylene oxide  sterilization or dama
224. roper Radical pulse oximeter performance     AN CautionA     Carefully route patient cables to reduce the possibility of patient entanglement or  strangulation     AN Caution    Do not soak or immerse patient cables in any liquid solution  Do not sterilize patient  cables by irradiation steam or ethylene oxide see the cleaning instructions in the  directions for use for reusable Masimo patient cables     m Maintenance  A Warning A    Before cleaning the monitor or the sensor  make sure that the equipment is switched  off and disconnected from the power line     For cleaning        13 10 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     SpO   Monitoring    m Use a cotton ball or a soft mull moistened with hospital grade ethanol to wipe the surface  of the sensor  and then dry it with a cloth  This cleaning method can also be applied to  the luminotron and receiving unit    m The cable can be cleaned with 3  hydrogen dioxide  70  isopropanol  or other active  reagent  However  connector of the sensor shall not be subjected to such solution     13 1 4 Alarm Description and Prompt    SpO2 Alarm Message    Among physiological alarms  those belonging to the type that the parameter has exceeded  the limits may activate the recorder to automatically output the parameters and related  measured waveforms when the alarms occur on the condition that the alarm record switch in  the related menu is On     TABLES BELOW DESCRIBE THE POSSIBLE PHYSIOLOGICAL ALARMS   TECHNICAL ALARMS AND PROMPT MESSAG
225. roximal female luer  open to atmosphere        Someone new on the staff began injecting  water into the luer but we caught it just as a  little went into the ICT B  Is the device  ruined     Probably not   repair     Return to Manufactory for          Why will the ICT B be damaged if we ETO  sterilize it with the luer plugged        When you plug the luer you are sealing the  internal lumens at normal atmospheric  pressure  Part of the ETO cycle is a partial          Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     16 21       IBP Monitoring             vacuum  Thus  the trapped air at atmospheric  pressure will expand and rupture the balloon        16 7 8 TROUBLE SHOOTING          baseline reappears  with the waveform  showing     TROUBLE CAUSE REMEDY  You inject air to   The catheter or tip is cut and   Readings cannot be trusted   check the zero and   cannot hold zero long enough    Remove the ICT B and use a  cal but the spare  The waveforms will be    accurate if that is all you need        The   indicates     damaged gauge     or    over range    and  if you inject air or  not  you cannot  see the waveform     monitor    Everything was  alright for several  hours and then the     damaged gauge       Either the tip is    wedged    or the  tip sensor was overpressured  against the dura during  insertion  Therefore the monitor  is seeing a transducer that has  a very high initial zero and finds  this zero out of its range     Although overpressured or  wedged  the sensor zero mu
226. rs during ioi Shutdown and re start  ERR3 initialization  RECORDER INIT Error occurs during low Shutdown and re start  ERR4 initialization  RECORDER INIT Error occurs during aw Shutdown and re start  ERR7 initialization  RECORDER INIT Error occurs during ian Shutdown and re start  ERR8 initialization       If after shutdown and re start  error still exists  contact out service engineers        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     7 7       Chapter 8 Trend and Event    PM 9000 provides 72 hour trend data of all parameters  storage of 400 NIBP measurement    results and 60 alarm events  This chapter gives detailed instruction for review of all data   8 1 Trend Graph    WH The latest 1 hour trend is displayed every 1 or 5 seconds      The latest 72 hour trend is displayed every 1  5 or 10 minutes   Pick  TREND GRAPH  in the SYSTEM MENU to call up the following menu     TREND GRAPH       BPM 2661 12 61 15 48 11   166 r   80   60   40   20   Ae 111 15 44  Wei 15 46 11 15 48 11    o a   PARA SELECT HR    RESOLUTION 18 D  L RIGHT 200M CURSOR REC    Select the name of the parameter whose trend is to  be selected     EXIT    Figure 8 1 TREND GRAPH Menu    The uppermost part is the name of the parameter  in which y axis stands for value and x axis  time   W   Indicates the value of the parameter  which it points to  is below the x axis  with  corresponding time displayed beyond the trend graph  Other trends except NIBP trend are  displayed as continuous curves  In NIBP trend grap
227. s     Check the connection of each  part or replace with a new  cuff  If the failure still exists   contact the manufacturer for  repair           Problem happens when   Check the connection of each  measuring the curve  The   part and the patient situation    MEASURE FAIL  system cannot perform   Measure again  if the failure  measurement  analysis or   still exists  contact the  calculation  manufacturer for repair   Problem happens when   Check the connection of each  measuring the curve  The   part and the patient situation    NIBP SYSTEM FAILURE    system cannot perform   Measure again  if the failure  measurement  analysis or   still exists  contact the  calculation  manufacturer for repair           AG NO WATERTRAP    The AG watertrap falls off  from the monitor     Check the connection of AG  watertrap sensor        CHANGE AG    WATERTRAP    Replace the AG watertrap       AG WATERTRAP_ TYPE  WRONG    The type of the AG watertrap  being used is not suitable     Check if the watertrap type is  correct  Check the connection  of each part or replace with a  new watertrap  If the failure still  exists  contact the  manufacturer for repair        AG INIT FAIL    AG module has failure        Check the connection of each  part and the patient situation        AG module failure   or Measure again  if the failure   GE COMNISTOF communication failure still exists  contact the  manufacturer for repair    Refer to the chapter of    AG OCCLUSION    AG COMM ERROR    The actual PUMP 
228. s  Pick  REC to print out all measurement data of NIBP RECALL     8 4 Alarm Event Recall    PM 9000 can display the latest 60 alarm events   m Select    ALARM RECALL    in the SYSTEM MENU to access ALARM RECALL  CONDITION menu as shown below     ALARM RECALL CONDITION    ALARM RECALL TIME    START  2001 gd 12   1   15 4 4    END   CURRENT TIME  SELF DEF INE    ALARM RECALL EVENT ALL id  ALARM RECALL  gt  gt     Select the beginning time of the alarm  concerned     EXIT    Figure 8 4 ALARM RECALL CONDITION Menu    In this menu  the user may select the conditions for alarm review  including    1  Start and End time of review   The user may select the start time of review in the item of START   Then the user may select the end time of review  Two selections are available  current  time and the user defined time   For user defined end time  the user can use the knob to select    2  ALARM RECALL EVENT  In the pull down list of ALARM RECALL EVENT  the user can select the parameter  whose alarm events he wants to review  The selections include ALL alarm events of all  parameters   ECG  REST  SPO2  NIBP  IBP  TEMP  CO2  CO  HR_H gt 180 the value of  HR is higher than the upper alarm limit   HR_L lt 60 the value of HR is below the lower  alarm limit   SPO2 lt 90   IBP_H gt 200mmHg  IBP_L lt 40mmHg  RR_H gt 40  RR_L lt 10   TEMP_H gt 40  C  TEMP_L lt 34  C   After setting up all the review conditions  press the    ALARM RECALL    button to access     ALARM RECALL    window    HR ALARM 
229. s  disinfectant     A Warning A    Do not autoclave the cable or heat it above 75  C  167  F   The cable should be stored in  an environmental temperature between  20  C to 75   C   68  F to 167  F   It should be  hung up or laid flat to prevent damage to the cable        17 10 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4        Chapter 18 CO2 Measuring    18 1 General    This chapter offers some relevant data concerning CO2 monitoring   PM 9000 provides two kinds of CO2 measuring methods as per the requirements of users   which are MainStream and SideStream   This module can be applied in operation room  monitor units etc  it can measure the CO2  partial pressure or concentration of patient Air Way  obtain EtCO2  Inspired Maximum CO2   InsCO2   Air Way Respiration Rate  AwRR   and display CO2 concentration waveforms  The  parameter symbols displayed on the screen are defined as following   CO2   EtCO   INS  InsCOz  AWRR  Air Way Respiration  AwRR  Resp  times MIN     A Note A    Don   t use the device in the environment with flammable anesthetic gas                                         The device can only be operated by personnel having taken professional training and  familiar with this manual     A Warning A    CO2 module shall be avoided from crash and vibration     18 2 Monitoring Procedure    Principle of CO2 measurement is primarily based on the fact that CO2 molecule can absorb  4 3um infrared ray  Absorption intensity is proportional to CO2 concentration of patient samp
230. s See Chapter Accessories and Ordering  Information for detail information of the ECG accessories    The cable that connects to the monitor   The lead set that connects to the patient    m Using a 5 lead set  the ECG can derive up to two waveforms from two different leads   For requested lead  you may choose from the left side of ECG waveform    m  The monitor displays the Heart Rate  HR   ST segment and Arrhythmia analysis    WH Allof the parameters above can be set as alarm parameters     A Note A    In the default settings of PM 9000  the ECG waveforms are the first two waveforms  from top in the Waveform Area     12 2 Precautions during ECG Monitoring    AY Warning A    Do not touch the patient  table nearby  or the equipment during defibrillation     A Warning A    Use only the original PM 9000 ECG cable for monitoring     A Warning A    When connecting the cables and electrodes  make sure no conductive part is in  contact with the ground  Verify that all ECG electrodes  including neutral electrodes   are securely attached to the patient        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  12 1    ECG RESP Monitoring    AY Warning A    When apply the ECG cable with no resistances to Mindray patient monitor or other  patient monitors which themselves with no current limit resistance  it can   t be applied  to defibrillation     A Note A    Interference from a non grounded instrument near the patient and ESU interference  can cause inaccuracy of the waveform     12 3 Monitoring 
231. s net card  Viewbed function is disabled        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4        Chapter 5 Alarm    This chapter gives general information about the alarm and corresponding remedies   Alarm setup and prompt messages are provided in respective parameter setup sections     A Warning A   When PM 9000 is powered on  the system may verify the audio and visual alarm  function  Upon turning on the monitor  a    Dang    will be heard and at the same time the  indicator will flash twice in yellow and red  This is used to verify the audio and visual  alarm function of the system  Therefore  the user should be carefully observe the  status  If the audio and visual alarm function is not normal  it indicates that the monitor  cannot be used to monitor a patient  Please contact Mindray Company or service  center     5 1 Alarm Modes    5 1 1 Alarm Level    Each alarm  either technical or physiological  has its own level  For alarm of higher level   when it occurs  the system will give prompt in a more alert way  Some alarm   s level can be set  by the user via software  Others can not by changed once defined by the system  Alarms in  PM 9000 are divided into three levels  that is  high  medium and low    High level alarm indicates the patient s life is in danger or the monitor under using has serious  problem in technical respect  It is the most serious alarm    Medium level alarm means serious warning    Low level alarm is a general warning    Alarms are classified into three 
232. s recommended that each institution establish the efficacy of its sterilization  procedure by a method which includes the sterilization of an intentionally  contaminated product     A Note A    There are only two chemical sterilization techniques recognized by the U S   Department of Agriculture as effective and truly sporicidal  gas sterilization by ethylene  oxide and liquid sterilization by a glutaraldehyde     e Ethylene oxide  ETO  Procedure    Unplug the female luer on the proximal connector before the ETO sterilization cycle  Failure to  do this will result in damage to the ICT B and render it unusable  The luer must be open to  allow free passage of ETO gas both internally and externally     E Package the ICT B in a coil in disposable ETO packaging  Include an approved  sterilization indicator     E Sterilize    Normal Cycle  in an accepted commercially available hospital sterilizer  Follow  the manufacturer s instructions for the sterilizer     Use the following as a guide only  In an actual hospital sterilization facility  the following  parameters were found to provide acceptable sterilization via ETO     Sterilizer make and model   AMSCO Eagle 2000  Prevacuum   15 minutes  24 inches Hg  Relative humidity   40    Temperature   140   F   ETO mix   12 88   Gas pressure   8 psi   Exposure time   1 hour 45 minutes   Post Vacuum   15 minutes  24 inches Hg  Aeration Cycle   12 hours    Calculated ETO Concentration   600 mg l  e Liquid Sterilization Procedure    Prevent l
233. splays  2000 1 1  the system gives this    Re set up the system time  It  is better to set up the time just  after the start up and prior to        REAL CLOCK RO reminding the  Wachahat monitoring the patient  After   NEEDSET  aes Dees modifying the time  the user  the current system time is not had better re start up the  right  monitor to avoid storing error   time    S The system has no cell battery   REAL CLOCK NOT Install or replace the   EXIST  ofthe Batlety Nas TN Ouro  rechargeable battery     the capacity            SYSTEM WD FAILURE         SYSTEM SOFTWARE  ERR         SYSTEM CMOS FULL         SYSTEM CMOS ERR         SYSTEM EPGA  FAILURE         SYSTEM FAILURE2         SYSTEM FAILURE3         SYSTEM FAILURE4         SYSTEM FAILURES         SYSTEM FAILURE6         SYSTEM FAILURE          SYSTEM FAILURE8         SYSTEM FAILURE9         SYSTEM FAILURE10         SYSTEM FAILURE11         SYSTEM FAILURE12     The system has serious error     Re start up the system  If the  failure still exists  contact the  manufacturer            KEYBOARD NOT  AVAILABLE      KEYBOARD COMM  ERR          KEBOARD ERROR          KEYBOARD ERR1          KEYBOARD ERR2      The keys on the keyboard  cannot be used     The keyboard has  which cannot be used     failure     Check the keys to see  whether it is pressed  manually or by other object  If  the key is not pressed  abnormally  contact the  manufacturer for repair     Contact the manufacturer for  repair            NET INIT ERR G         
234. ssive illumination  such as surgical lamps  especially ones with a  xenon light source   bilirubin lamps  fluorescent lights  infrared heating lamps  or  direct sunlight  exposure to excessive illumination can be corrected by covering the  sensor with a dark or opaque material    excessive patient movement   venous pulsations   placement of a sensor on an extremity with a blood pressure cuff  arterial catheter   or intravascular line    the monitor can be used during defibrillation  but the readings may be inaccurate for a  short time   Loss of pulse signal can occur in any of the following situation     the sensor is too tight   there is excessive illumination from light sources such as a surgical lamp  a  bilirubin lamp  or sunlight   a blood pressure cuff is inflated on the same extremity as the one with a SpO2  sensor attached    the patient has hypotension  severe vasoconstriction  severe anemia  or  hypothermia   there is arterial occlusion proximal to the sensor   the patient is in cardiac arrest or is in shock    SpO gt 2 plethysmogram measurement   MASIMO SET    ONLY    1  Switch on the monitor    2  Attach the sensor to the appropriate site of the patient finger    3  Plug the connector of the sensor extension cable into the SpO  socket on the PM 9000        Figure 13 1 mounting of the sensor    SpO2 SETUP Menu    Pick the SpO2 hot key on the screen to call up the SoO2 SETUP menu as shown below        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     SpO2 Monitoring    MAS
235. st  have been just within the range  of the monitor  As conditions    If the tip is wedged  pull back a few  millimeters to free it  This will allow  the monitor to be zeroed  If this  does not help  the transducer has  been strained and must come out  and be returned for repair     Sometimes raising the scale on the  monitor will allow it to manage a  transducer with a high zero offset   Try raising the pressure scale to  90  120 or 300mmHg and then  setting zero  If this works  the only  thing that you will sacrifice is the  waveform resolution  Return the  catheter for repair when the  measurement is finished     Try raising the pressure scale to  90  120 or 300mmHg and then  setting zero        If indeed placed properly  the  brain may have moved away  from the skull substantially  enough so that there is poor  contact between the skull   transducer and the dura  This  may happen soon after the  transducer is placed but may  correct itself in a short time     or    over range      changed  the total pressure  light came on    zero amount ICP   pushed   the monitor beyond its   capabilities   The transducer   The sensor face must be flat   It is important that the transducer  can be zeroed and    planar  against the dura  If its   face be placed against an intact  we have good   facing the inner table of the   section of dura   pressure waves   skull for example  then you will If required  use a contralateral burr  but the ICP reads   get pressure waves and be hole  consta
236. st  its system time accordingly  Besides  the Central Station will keep on sending its current time       3 6 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     System Menu    to the monitor once per hour to maintain consistent time between them  However  the monitor  will not adjust its time if it is different from the Central Station only in second  Please note that  if you are setting up the system time when link is just established successfully  the monitor will  immediately close the setup menu of system time  The setup button of system time in the  system setup menu is disabled when the monitor is linked to the Central Station  That means  you cannot open the setup menu of system time    If the Central Station has no this function   you can skip over this paragraph       3 4 4 Analog    The monitor can output an analog waveform  whose time delay is less than 30ms  The output  terminal is on the rear panel    Select    ANALOG    item in    SYSTEM SETUP    menu to call up the ANALOG menu  The first  item is for setting up On Off of the switch of the analog output  The second item is for  selecting the waveform name to be output    Select    EXIT    item to return to the previous menu     ANALOG OUT    ANALOG WAVE ECG1 v  Open close analog output   On  outputing analog wave    EXIT    Figure 3 10 ANALOG  AN Note A  In the USER MAINTAIN menu  If the AUX OUTPUT item being selected with NURSE  CALL  the AUX OUTPUT port will be used to realize NURSE CALL function while     ANALOG OUT 
237. such as reorienting or relocating the monitor      Over the frequency range 150kHz to 80 MHz  field strengths should be less than 3V m        TABLE 4       Recommended separation distances between portable and mobile RF  communications equipment and the monitor       The monitor is intended for user in an electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF disturbance  are controlled  The customer or the user of the monitor can help prevent electromagnetic interference  by maintain a minimum distance between portable and mobile RF communication equipment   transmitters  and the monitor as recommended below  according to the maximum output power of the  communication equipment                          Rated maximum output   Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter  power of transmitter m  Ww 150 kHz to 80 MHz   80 MHz to 800 MHz 800 MHz to 2 5  d 1 2x P d 1 2x P GHz   d 2 3x VP   0 01 0 12 0 12 0 23   0 1 0 38 0 38 0 73   1 1 2 1 2 2 3   10 3 8 3 8 7 3   100 12 12 23                   For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above  the recommended  separation distanced d in meters  m  can be estimated using the equation applicable to the  frequency of the transmitter  where P is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in  watts  W  according to the transmitter manufacturer    NOTE 1     At 80 MHz and 800 MHz  the separation distance for the higher frequency range applies   NOTE 2     These guidelines may not apply in all situations  
238. surement is necessary for every two years  or  as frequently as dictated by your Hospital Procedures Policy   When you need calibrate  the temperature measurement  contact the manufacture please     AN Note A    The self test of the temperature measurement is performed automatically once per  hour during the monitoring  The test procedure lasts about 2 seconds and does not  affect the normal measurement of the temperature monitoring        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  15 1    TEMP Monitoring    15 2 TEMP SETUP Menu    Pick the TEMP hot key on the screen to call up the TEMP SETUP menu shown as below     TEMP SETUP    ALM ON    LZ ALM HI 39 0     ALM LEU MED   T2 ALM LO 36 0     ALM REC OFF   TDALM HI 2 0     Ti ALM HI 39 0 Ss TEMP UNIT    z   Ti ALM LO 36 0   DEFAULT  gt  gt   EXIT    Figure 15 1 TEMP SETUP Menu    TEMP alarm setting  m ALM  pick  ON  to enable prompt message and data record during the TEMP alarm   pick  OFF  to disable the alarm function  and prompt the 2 symbol beside TEMP  numeric   m ALM LEV  used to set up the alarm level  selectable from HIGH  MED or LOW   m ALM REC  used to start stop recording TEMP alarms  Pick  ON  to enable report  printing upon TEMP alarm   m Alarm for T1  T2 and TD occurs when the measured temperature exceeds set alarm  high limit or falls below alarm low limit   T1 is Channel 1 temperature  T2 is Channel 2 temperature  TD is the temperature  difference between the above two     TEMP alarm limits        Max  TEMP HI Min 
239. tal probes should be used  if possible  in conjunction with a protective rubber  cover    5 To clean the probe  hold the tip with one hand and with the other hand rubbing the  probe down in the direction of the connector using a moist lint free cloth     A Note A    Disposable TEMP probe must not be re sterilized or reused     A Note A    For protecting environment  the disposable TEMP probe must be recycled or disposed  of properly        15 4 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     Chapter 16 IBP Monitoring    16 1 Introduction    This chapter introduces IBP measurement  maintenance and cleaning of relevant  accessories    The Monitor measures direct blood pressure  SYS  DIA and MAP  of one selected blood  vessel through two channels  and displays two BP waveforms measures direct blood pressure   SYS  DIA and MAP     The available pressure labels are                 Label Definition  ART Arterial Blood Pressure  PA Pulmonary Arterial Pressure  CVP Center Venous Pressure  RAP Right Atrial Pressure  LAP Left Atrial Pressure       Intracranial Pressure  ICT B Transducer  information Refer to 16 7     P1 P2 Expand Pressure    ICP          16 2 Precautions during IBP Monitoring    A Warning A    Parts and accessories used must meet the safety requirements of the medical  electrical equipment standards     A Warning A    Do not contact the metal part connected to the electrical appliance when connecting or  using the accessory     A Warning A    When the monitor is used with H
240. ted  do not use the  catheter and return it to Manufactory for repair     Proper function before insertion into the epidural space should be confirmed by gently  touching the tip of the transducer and observing a deflection on the operating room pressure  monitor     Once the ICT B has been inserted into the epidural space  the physician should check the  proper function again  by injecting 0 3cc of air to check the zero of the ICT B  The monitor  should respond correctly as previously described      J Review of techniques to prevent damage to the catheter     1  In preparing the burr hole  it is imperative that the hole be rounded at the edges where  the catheter makes an  S  bend into the epidural space    2  Evacuate all bone chips    3  A small pledgelet of woven bandage should be placed around the catheter where  sutures will be placed  This will prevent damage to the catheter when pulling sutures  tight  Otherwise you may cut the catheter    4  Use some bone wax on the edges of bone where the catheter and tip make contact  with bone    5  When removing the catheter  care should be taken not to cut the device while cutting  sutures  Remove the ICT B by pulling slowly on the catheter    6  The dura mater should be stripped sufficiently so that the tip of the sensor is not forced  or wedged into place    7  Do not use haemostats or forceps  they will damage the device  Do not squeeze the       16 18 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     IBP Monitoring    sensor betwee
241. tem cannot perform   cuff  If the failure still exists   measurement  analysis or   contact the manufacturer for  calculation  repair         EXCESSIVE MOTION     The patient arm moves     Check the connection of each  part and the patient situation   Measure again  if the failure  still exists  contact the  manufacturer for repair        Check for the smoothness in                         a the airway and patient   OVER PRESSURE  SE folds exis inthe situation  Measure again  if  airway     the failure still exists  contact  the manufacturer for repair   Problem happens when   Check the connection of each  measuring the curve  The   part and the patient situation    SIGNAL SATURATED  system cannot perform   Measure again  if the failure  measurement  analysis or   still exists  contact the  calculation  manufacturer for repair   Problem happens when   Check the connection of each  measuring the curve  The   part and the patient situation    NIBP TIME OUT  system cannot perform   Measure again  if the failure  measurement  analysis or   still exists  contact the  calculation  manufacturer for repair   8 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4        System Alarm Prompt        CUFF TYPE ERR     Perhaps the used cuff does not  fit the setup patient type     Check if the patient type is set  up correctly  Check the  connection of each part or  replace with a new cuff  If the  failure still exists  contact the  manufacturer for repair         PNEUMATIC LEAK     NIBP airway has leak
242. the monitor     7 2 Recording Type    PM 9000 provides several stripe recording types   Continuous real time recording   8 second real time recording   Auto 8 second recording   Alarm recording   Waveform freeze recording   Trend graph table recording   ARR events review recording   Alarm event recording   NIBP review recording   CO2 Measurement review recording   AG Measurement review recording   CO Measurement curve recording  Hemodynamic Calculation result recording    Monitor information recording       Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  7 1    Recording    WR Drug calculation titration recording  WR OxyCRG recording    Real time Recording    Real time recording starts as you press the REC STOP button on the recorder     The waveforms for continuous real time recording and continuous 8 second recording are  automatically set by the monitor  usually the first two waveforms displayed on the screen    You can also configure it through the menu  Refer to related section for details    In RECORD menu  the user can choose two waveforms to be printed out  The User can setup  one waveform off  Thus  the real time record will print out one waveform  If two waveforms are  off  the real time record will print out measure parameters only     A Note A    If certain recording is in process  and another parameter demands alarm recording  it  will only be executed after the earlier recording is finished     Auto recording    The monitor starts the recorder for 8 seconds according to
243. thetic gas generated by AG module       RT REC TIME this item has two options  CONTINUAL and 8s     CONTINUAL    means  once pushing the    REC STOP    button on the recorder panel or the monitor panel  the    recorder will continuously print out the waveform or parameter until this button is pushed    again       TIMING REC TIME OFF used to set up the time interval between two recordings  10    selections    are available     OFF  10min  20min  30min  40min  50min  1hour  2hours     3hours and 4hours     The system will start the recording process according to the selected    time interval  The recording time is always 8 seconds     A Note A    RT REC TIME takes priority over TIMING REC TIME OFF       REC RATE  this item has two options  25 0 and 50 0 mm s     REC GRID  used to decide output format  OFF is without grid  and ON is with grid     CLEAR REC TASK  used to clear the alarm event that has been generated and is waiting    for recording out     A Note A    H two same waveforms are selected  the system will automatically change one of the    waveform to a different one     3 4 6 Module Setup    Select the  MODULE SETUP  item in the    SYSTEM SETUP    menu to call up the following    menu        3 8    Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     System Menu    MODULE SETUP    v ECG v IBP 1 2     RESP v c02     TEMP v CO   v SP02     NIBP    Back to the upper menu         EES    Figure 3 12 Module Setup  You can choose the parameters to be monitored in this menu  This can
244. tifies  biomedical engineer   ECGINITERRS   or Mindray service  ECG INIT ERR6 staff   ECG INIT ERR7  ECG INIT ERR8  If failure persists   ECG COMM STOP Occasional communication HIGH notify biomedical    failure engineer or Mindray  service staff     If failure persists   ECG COMM ERR Occasional communication HIGH notify biomedical   failure engineer or Mindray  service staff     Stop using HR alarm  function  notify  HR ALM LMT ERR Functional safety failure HIGH biomedical engineer  or Mindray service  staff     Make sure the  patient is quiet  the  electrodes are  LOW properly connected  and AC power  system is well  grounded     ECG measuring signal is    ECG NOISE greatly interfered                       Prompt messages  include general alerts      Message Cause Alarm Level       HR EXCEED HR measuring value exceeds the HIGH  measurement range     12 7 ST Segment Monitoring  optional     ST Segment Monitoring  Optional     WH ST segment monitoring function is shutoff by default  You can switch it to ON when  necessary        12 12 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     ECG RESP Monitoring    NOTE  When setting ST ANALYSIS on  the monitor will select    DIAGNOSTIC    mode  You  can set it to    MONITOR    mode or    OPERATE    mode as required  However at this time  ST value has been severely distorted    It is available to measure the variance of ST segment with ST analysis at the waveform  tracks for selected lead  The corresponding ST measurement result displays nume
245. ting window is not selected for calculation  excluded from the averaging calculations   the  place will be taken by the new measurement     E Editing the CO measurement  Pick the    EDIT    button to access the WINDOWS FOR C O  EDIT as shown below     WINDOW FOR CO  EDIT       0     AVERAGE COC l min  2 49 HEMO CALCULATE  gt  gt  0  o     CICl minzm 2  3 3    Back to the upper menu     O    Figure 17 3 CO Edit Windows      Contents displayed in the window   O Six curves of the six measurements and C O  value     Average value of cardiac output  D Average value of cardiac index     Function button in the edit window     Editing operation   Values of selected measurements can be averaged and stored in the CO item in the  HEMOD menu as the basis for Hemodynamic calculations   When first enter the EDIT Window  curves and CO values of valid measurements  are highlighted  indicating these values are to be averaged  You can move the  cursor to the curve of questionable measurements and press the rotary knob   dis highlighted waveforms and CO values will be excluded from the averaging  calculation      A Note A    Dis highlighted curves can be picked and included into the averaging calculation     17 2 3 Blood Temperature Monitoring       Blood temperature monitoring can function when C O  measurement is not taken  The  blood temperature is measured by the thermistor situated in the distal end of the flotation  catheter in the pulmonary artery   See the diagram below     WH The blood
246. tion regulations  mandated by the local and regional bodies of government         Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  Ul       Return Policy    Return Procedure    In the event that it becomes necessary to return a unit to Mindray  the following procedure  should be followed     1  Obtain return authorization  Contact the Mindray Service Department and obtain a  Customer Service Authorization  Mindray  number  The Mindray number must appear on  the outside of the shipping container  Return shipments will not be accepted if the  Mindray number is not clearly visible  Please provide the model number  serial number   and a brief description of the reason for return     2  Freight policy  The customer is responsible for freight charges when equipment is  shipped to Mindray for service  this includes customs charges      Company Contact    Address  Mindray Building  Keji 12th Road South  Hi tech  Industrial Park  Nanshan  Shenzhen  P  R  China    518057   Phone   86 755 2658 2888  Fax   86 755 2658 2680    Free hot line   86 800 830 3312    EC Representative    Name  Shanghai International Holding Corp  GmbH Europe   Address  Eiffestrasse 80 D 20537 Hamburg Germany   Phone   49 40 2513174   Fax   49 40 255726       IV Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4        Preface    This manual gives detailed description to PM 9000 Portable Patient Monitor concerning its  performance  operation  and other safety information  Reading through this manual is the first  step for the user t
247. to reduce and hence make the measurement impossible      The absorption of oxyhemoglobin  HbO2  and deoxyhemoglobin to the light of special  wavelength may also affect SoO2 measurement  If there exist other objects  carbon  hemoglobin  methemoglobin  methylene blue and indigo carmine  absorbing the light of  the same wavelength  they may result in false or low SpOz value      Itis recommended to use SpOz sensors described in chapter Accessories and Ordering   Information     13 2 5 SpO2 Menu    SPO2 SETUP Menu    Turn the knob to move the cursor onto the SPO2 hot key in the Parameter area  push the  knob to access the SPO2 SETUP menu        13 18 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     SpO2 Monitoring    SPOZ SETUP    ALM PR ALM LO 50    ALM LEU MED   SWEEP 25 0    ALM REC OFF   PR SOUND 2      SPOZ ALM HI 100   AVG TIME 45 s  SP02 ALM LO 90  gt  DEFAULT  gt  gt   PR ALM HI 120      Open or close the Sp02Z alarn     EXIT    Figure 13 7 SPO2 SETUP menu    A Warning A    Setting the SpO   upper alarm limit to 100  is equivalent to switching off the alarm on  upper limit  High oxygen levels may predispose a premature infant to retrolental  fibroplasia  Therefore  the upper alarm limit for oxygen saturation must be carefully  selected in accordance with commonly accepted clinical practices     SpO  alarm setting   m ALM  pick  ON   the system will give alarm prompt and store alarm information when SpO2  alarm occurs  pick  OFF   the system will not give alarm and instead displ
248. tted line      EXIT    75       gt      gt      gt     Figure 16 8 IBP SCALE ADJUST Menu       Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     IBP Monitoring    The waveform and corresponding scale appears in the IBP Waveform Area with 3 dotted lines  representing Higher Scale  Reference Scale  and Lower Scale from the top to the bottom   Values of the three scales can be set according to the instruction given below     WH IBP label  Selectable from ART  PA  CVP  RAP  LAP  ICP  P1  P2   WH HI  IBP value of Higher scale   the range of which is the measurable range of current  pressure     AY Note A    The HI value must be higher than the LO value     m LO  IBP value of Lower scale   the range of which is the measurable range of current  pressure     A Note A    The LO value must be lower than the HI value        VAL  IBP value of Reference scale  between HI and LO      A Note A    HI scale  LO scale  Reference scale and IBP waveform are displayed simultaneously on  the screen  user could obviously view the change of the waveform after the scale has  been adjusted     16 5 Alarm Information and Prompts    Alarm Messages    Physiological alarm  caused by the parameter value exceeds the limits  will activate the  recorder to automatically outputting the parameters and related measuring waveforms once  the alarm occur while ALARM REC in related menu switch ON    Tables below describe the possible physiological alarms  technical alarms and prompt  messages occurring during IBP measureme
249. ty  rubescence  vesicle  repressive  putrescence  and so on  It is especially important to check the sensor placement of  neonate and patient of poor perfusion or immature dermogram by light collimation and  proper attaching strictly according to changes of the skin  Check per 2 3 hours the  sensor placement and move it when the skin deteriorates  More frequent examinations  may be required for different patients        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  13 15    SpO2 Monitoring    13 2 3 Monitoring Procedure    SpO  plethysmogram measurement  1  Switch on the monitor   2  Attach the sensor to the appropriate site of the patient finger     3  Plug the connector of the sensor extension cable into the SpO  socket on the SpO2  module        Figure 13 3 Mounting of the sensor    m Neonate SpO  Measurement  The process of measuring neonate SpO  is similar to that of measuring adult SpO2  Below is  the description of neonate SpO  sensor and its installation     1  Neonate SpO  sensor   Neonate SpOz sensor consists of Y form SpOz2 sensor and its sheath  Insert the LED and PD  ends of the Y form SpO  sensor respectively into the upper and lower grooves on the sheath   figure 13 4   Figure 13 5 shows us the neonate SpO gt z sensor after insertion        Figure 13 4 Neonate SpO  sensor  1        13 16 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     SpO   Monitoring       Figure 13 5 Neonate SpO gt  sensor  2     2  Attaching Neonate SpO  sensor   Wind the SpO   sensor around a hand or 
250. ure and ambient pressure and turn it off when measuring  the    dry    gas under the ambient temperature and pressure    4  Operate by strictly observing the Compensate operation method     m DEFAULT  pick this item to access the CO2 DEFAULT CONFIG dialog box  in which the  user may select whether the FACTORY DEFAULT CONFIG or the USER DEFAULT  CONFIG is to be used  After selecting any of the items and exiting the dialog box  the  system will pop up the dialog box asking for the user   s confirmation     EtCO2 upper alarm limit  when parameter value exceeds this limit  there will be alarm for  exceeding the upper limit    Default    Adult  50 mmHg   Pediatric  50 mmHg   Neonatal  45 mmHg  EtCO2 lower alarm limit  when parameter value is smaller than the lower limit  there will be  alarm for exceeding lower limit    Default    Adult  15 mmHg   Pediatric  20 mmHg   Neonatal  30 mmHg  InsCO2 upper alarm limit  when parameter value exceeds this limit  there will be alarm for  exceeding upper limit    Default    Adult  4 mmHg   Pediatric  4 mmHg   Neonatal  4 mmHg  AwRR upper alarm limit  when parameter value exceeds this limit  there will be alarm for   exceeding upper limit    Default    Adult  30 rpm       18 6 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     CO2 Monitoring    Pediatric  30 rpm  Neonatal  100 rpm  AwRR lower alarm limit  when parameter value is smaller than the limit  there will be alarm for  exceeding lower limit   Default   Adult  8 rpm  Pediatric  8 rpm  Neonatal 
251. urned for repair  an inconvenience that may be avoided by smoothing  areas of bone in contact with the catheter transducer     The catheter is led out through the wound in the manner of a drain  It may make sharp bends  without disturbing the operation of the ICT B  Care should be taken though  not to pinch the  catheter by bending onto itself at acute angles for this will seal and possibly damage the  internal lumens required for proper operation     The catheter should be restrained from moving once the tip is in place  It may be fixed to the  scalp by encircling sutures or with a silicone rubber suture collar available from manufacturers  of such items as peritoneal shunt systems  The latter method is preferred as it will help  prevent damage to the catheter by sutures or during removal of sutures     Another method is by first approaching the burr hole through a tunnel under the skin  entering  the tunnel from a point distal to the burr hole by making a small incision in the skin   The  ICT B can be guided in the tunnel by using a disposable tube removable from the burr hole  side     This latter method is to be preferred from both a mechanical stability point of view and from  the reported low incidence of infection  The catheter can then be led out in the manner of a  drain and the burr hole incision sutured     The physician is urged to examine the ICT B for physical damage to the silicone rubber  covering anywhere on the tip or catheter before use  If damage is suspec
252. us  clear  screen waveforms and resume to display real time waveforms  In the Screen Refresh  mode  the system begins scanning waveforms from the extreme left one  In the Screen  Scroll mode  the system begins displaying and scrolling waveforms from the extreme  right one     6 3 FROZEN Menu    Press the    FREEZE    button on the button module  the FROZEN menu will appear on the  bottom part of the screen  At the same time  the system enters the Freeze status     WAVE 1 WAVE 2 ECG2      RECALL REC EXIT    Figure 6 1 FROZEN menu    m WAVE 1  used to select the first frozen waveform to record  The  pull down list of this item gives you the names of all frozen waveforms  displayed on the screen     m WAVE 2   used to select the second frozen waveform to record  The  pull down list of this item gives you the names of all waveforms displayed  on the screen     H RECALL   used to review frozen waveforms     m REC  after selected  the system begins recording the frozen waveforms  selected in    WAVE 1    and    WAVE 2         H EXIT   after pressed  the system closes the FROZEN menu and exits  the Freeze status      AN Note A    Pressing the    FREEZE    button repeatedly in short time period may result in  discontinuous waveforms on the screen        6 2 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     Freeze    6 4 Reviewing Frozen Waveform    By moving the waveform  you may review a waveform of 40 seconds before the moment  when it is frozen  For a waveform less than 40 seconds  the r
253. use    SpO  measuring value is above upper alarm limit     SpO2 Monitoring    Alarm Level    User selectable       SpO2 TOO LOW    SpO2 measuring value is below lower alarm limit     User selectable       PR TOO HIGH    PR measuring value is above upper alarm limit     User selectable          PR TOO LOW       PR measuring value is below lower alarm limit           User selectable       Technical alarms     Alarm                                              failure             Message Cause level Remedy  Make sure that the  SE monitor and the patient  SPO2 SENSOR OFF fom  dhe patient LOW are in correct  orhe eer connection with the    cables   SPO2 INIT ERR  SPO2 INIT ERR 1  SPO2 INIT ERR 2  SPO2 INIT ERR 3 Stop using   the  SpO m  d  l   measuring function of  SPO2 INIT ERR 4 failure HIGH SpO gt  module  notify  biomedical engineer or  SPO2 INIT ERR 5 Mindray service staff   SPO2 INIT ERR 6  SPO2 INIT ERR 7  SPO2 INIT ERR 8  Stop using the  ae ae measuring function of  SPO2 COMM STOP ae HIGH SpO gt  module  notify  communication l      Sirr biomedical engineer or  Mindray service staff   Stop using the  P a measuring function of  SPO2 COMM ERR Be E EE HIGH SpO2 module  notify  error biomedical engineer or  Mindray service staff   Stop using the    measuring function of  SPO2 ALM LMT ERR Fri SEH HIGH  SpO  module  notify  biomedical engineer or  Mindray service staff   Stop using the  measuring function of  PR ALM LMT ERR ee HIGH  SpO gt  module  notify    biomedical engineer
254. ve alarm  limits     User selectable       AWRR TOO HIGH    AwRR measuring value is above upper  alarm limit     User selectable       AWRR TOO LOW    AwRR measuring value is below lower  alarm limit     User selectable       In specific time interval  no RESP can be                                                                         Ee detected using CO2 module  GE  Technical alarms   Alarm  Message Cause Level Remedy  Mainstream sensor is not Make sure that  CO2 SENSOR OFF properly connected or has LOW mainstream sensor is  fallen off  properly connected   CO2 NO Sidestream water trap is not Make sure that  WATERTRAP properly connected or has LOW sidestream water trap  fallen off  is soundly connected   CO2 WATERTRAP Sidestream water trap is Low FER E Sie  OCCLUDE occluded  H  functions smoothly   CO2 SIGNAL LOW Measuring module technical LOW If necessary  re start  failure the monitor  If failure  CO2 SIGNAL TOO LOW persists  stop using  LOW measuring function of  CO2 BAROMTRC MED CO2 module  notify  TOO LARGE biomedical engineer  CO2 PNEUMATIC MED or Mindray service  LEAK staff   CO2 SIGNAL NOISY LOW  CO2 SIGNAL  SATURATE SEH  CO2 CALCULATION  ERR HIGH  CO2 SENSOR FAULT HIGH  CO2 SENSOR TEMP  HIGH HIGH  CO2 SENSOR TEMP  LOW HIGH  CO2 WATCHDOG  TIMEOUT PGR  CO2 INT COMM ERR HIGH  CO2 SYSTEM ROM  ERR HIGH  CO2 FLASH CRC  ERR HIGH  CO2 INT RAM ERR HIGH  CO2 FLASH CHECK  ERR HIGH  CO2 EXT RAM ERR HIGH  CO2 STACK OVER HIGH  CO2 PUMP FAULT HIGH  CO2 REVERSE HIGH    FLOW    
255. will display     A Note A    If the monitor finds any fatal error during self test  it will alarm     A Note A    Check all the functions that may be used to monitor and make sure that the monitor is  in good status     A Note A    The battery must be recharged to the full electricity after each use to ensure adequate  electricity reserve     A Warning A    If any sign of damage is detected  or the monitor displays some error messages  do  not use it on any patient  Contact biomedical engineer in the hospital or Mindray  Customer Service Center immediately     A Note A    The interval between twice press of POWER should be more than 1 minute        2 2 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     Getting Started    2 4 Connect Patient Sensors    Connect all the necessary patient sensors between the monitor and the patient     A Note A    For information on correct connection  refer to related chapter 12 19     2 5 Check the Recorder    If your monitor is equipped with a recorder  open the recorder door to check if paper is  properly installed in the output slot  If no paper present  refer to Chapter Recording for  details        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  2 3       Chapter 3 System Menu    New patient enrolment   Recording   Trend Graph Table and Alarm Review  System Setup   Drug Calculation    Maintenance    PM 9000 Portable Multi Parameter Patient Monitor features flexible configurations  You can  customize monitoring content  waveform sweep speed  sound volume  
256. wo seconds on the most recent  four seconds of raw data  The SpOz value therefore corresponds to a running average of  arterial hemoglobin saturation that is updated every two seconds     13 1 1 Precautions    A Warning AN    This pulse wave from M 7 should NOT be used as an apnea monitoring     AY Warning AN    This monitor with M 7 should be considered an early warning device for SpO2  As a  trend towards patient deoxygenation is indicated  blood samples should be analyzed  by a laboratory co oximeter to completely understand the patient   s condition     AN Warning AN    If an alarm condition  other than exceptions listed herein  occurs while the alarm  silence period is set to off  the only alarm indications will be visual displays and  symbols related to the alarm condition     A Warning AY    Measure the monitor   s leakage current whenever an external device is connected to       Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  13 3    SpO2 Monitoring    the serial port  Leakage current must not exceed 100 microamperes     AN Warning A    To ensure patient electrical isolation  connect only to other equipment with  electronically isolated circuits     A Warning A    Do not connect to an electrical outlet controlled by a wall switch or dimmer     A Warning A    As with all medical equipment  carefully route patient cabling to reduce the possibility  of patient entanglement or strangulation     A Warning A    Interfering Substances  Carboxyhemoglobin may erroneously increase read
257. ximately 0 3cc of air into the female  luer using a 1ml syringe and note that the monitor does indeed immediately go to zero  Also  note that if the ICT B is moved rapidly up and down in a column of water pressure waves of  high fidelity are seen  The ICT B has a very high frequency response and you will observe  excellent pressure waves in actual practice  It can also be confirmed that the exact amount of  air injected to check the zero is not important     16 7 5 Note to the neurosuregeon    The ICT B is intended for the measurement of epidural pressures  Use of the transducer for  the measurement of intraventricular pressures is not recommended  The ICT B is designed  for the measurement of positive pressures only        16 16 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     IBP Monitoring    A Note A    Catheter Tip Pressure Transducers must be used under the supervision of a suitably  qualified Physician       Method of Application of the ICT B    The application of the ICT B may be accomplished through a variety of surgical techniques   Therefore  the surgeon is best advised to use the method which his own practice and  discretion dictate to be best for the patient  The following are some general guidelines     The ICT B may be inserted during surgery or through a burr hole  When in place  the catheter  tip transducer should have its pressure sensing surface facing against the dura  under the  cranium  There are 2 5cm marks on the back of the catheter and these are visible wh
258. y        1 14 Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4     Introduction       Figure 1 7 Battery Slot Cover  A Warning A    After the patient monitor has been placed unused for a long time  the battery must be  recharged before use again  When not using the patient monitor for a long time without  charging the battery  the battery capacity will decrease  Connect the patient monitor to  appropriate AC mains to charge the battery    Mindray recommends replace the sealed Lead Acid battery once per year  Dispose or  recycle the battery and other parts of the patient monitor by following local government  regulations        Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  1 15       Chapter 2 Getting Started    Open the package and check  Connect the power cables  Power on the monitor  Connect patient sensors    Check the recorder    A Note A    To ensure that the monitor works properly  please read Chapter Patient Safety  and  follow the steps before using the monitor     2 1 Open the Package and Check    Open the package and take out the monitor and accessories carefully  Keep the package for  possible future transportation or storage  Check the components according to the packing list   mM Check for any mechanical damage    WH Check all the cables  modules and accessories    If there is any problem  contact the distributor immediately     2 2 Connect the Power Cables    Connection procedure of the AC power line    H Make sure the AC power supply complies with following specification  100 
259. y waveform on the screen        12 20    Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4        ECG RESP Monitoring    12 9 2 Setting Up RESP measurement    For RESP monitoring  it is not necessary for additional electrodes  however  the placing of  electrodes is important     Some patients  due to their clinical condition  expand their chest laterally  causing a negative  intrathoracic pressure  In these cases it is better to place the two RESP electrodes laterally in  the right axillary and left lateral chest areas at the maximum point of breathing movement to  optimize the respiratory waveform     A Note A    The RESP monitoring is not recommended to be used on patients who are very active   as this can cause false alarms     Checklist for RESP Monitoring   1  Prepare the patient s skin prior to placing the electrodes    2  Attach snap or clip to the electrodes and attach the electrodes to the patient as described  below    3  Switch on the monitor     12 9 3 Installing electrode for RESP measurement    Placing the Electrodes for Respiratory Monitoring       Figure 12 16 Electrodes placement  5 lead     A Note A    Place the red and green electrodes diagonally to optimize the respiration waveform   Avoid the liver area and the ventricles of the heart in the line between the RESP  electrodes so as to avoid cardiac overlay or artifacts from pulsating blood flow  This is       Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  12 21    ECG RESP Monitoring    particularly important for neonates  
260. ype    The system can display all waveforms about monitored patient on the screen either in     Refresh    or    Scroll    way  The method is    Select    SELECTION    item in    SYSTEM MENU    to access    SELECTION    sub menu  in which  there is the item    SCAN TYPE     The user may decide the way to display the waveform by  choosing either    REFRESH    or    SCROLL        Alarm Limits    The system can display the alarm limits  You can choose this function as per your need  The  method is    Select the  SELECTION  in the    SYSTEM MENU    to call up the    SELECTION    menu  You can  set the    ALM LIMIT    switch to    ON    or    OFF           Patient Monitor user   s manual  V 5 4  3 11    System Menu    3 6 Monitor Version    Select the  VERSION  item in the    SYSTEM MENU    to know the software version of the    monitor   VERSION    Version 05 08 00 07 31 2001  Copyright c  Mindray Co   Ltd   Compile Time  Apr 16 2003    DEVICE CONFIG LIST  gt  gt       Back to the upper menu     Figure 3 17 Monitor Version  Select the  DEVICE CONFIG LIST  to know the configuration of the monitor     DEVICE CONFIG LIST      DYNAMIC TREND MODULE  v oxyCRG   ECG     VIEWBED   RESP    WAVE SCROLL DISPLAY   TEMP    PARA ALARM LIMIT DISPLAY   SPOZ      DRUG CALC  amp  TITRATION v NIBP     ARR  amp  ST ANALYSIS   IBP     ECG LEAD TYPE   5 LEADS v CO     ECG MULTI LEADS DISPLAY   C02     NIBP LIST DISPLAY GAS  POWER OFF DATA STORAGE   RECORDER       Back to the upper menu     Figure 3 18
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
DataVideo DVK-100 video capture board  CV completo - Allegro Galería  オンラインサービスマニュアル ダウンロード  Progress Lighting P5432-10 Installation Guide  43/2000/240  この報告書をダウンロードする  内部水源地 接合井用水位計 設置工事 特記仕様書 四日市市上下水道局  User`s Manual  Fantec 1910 power supply unit      Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file